Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website: http://www.huawei.com Email: support@huawei.com Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i About This Document Related Versions The following table lists the product versions that correspond to this documentation. Product Name Product Version OptiX 155/622H V300R007C02 iManager U2000 V100R002C01
Intended Audience This document describes the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) Optical Transmission System (hereinafter referred to as the OptiX 155/622H) in the aspects such as equipment, board, protection, maintenance, and management to enable a reader to have a comprehensive understanding of the product. The OptiX 155/622H is managed by the transport network management system (hereinafter referred to as the NMS). This document is intended for: l Network planning engineers l Data configuration engineer l System maintenance engineer Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description About This Document Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii Symbol Description Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions Convention Meaning Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. > Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History Updates between document issues are cumulative.Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues. Updates in Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Based on Product Version V300R007C02 This document of the V300R007C02 version is of the second release. The updated contents are as follows. l This document specifies when to use packet/TDM domain and when to use packet/TDM mode. Updates in Issue 01 (2010-08-13) Based on Product Version V300R007C02 This document of the V300R007C02 version is of the first release. The updated contents are as follows. l The description about license control is added. l The description about the PW APS protection is added. Updates in Issue 02 (2009-10-20) Based on Product Version V300R007C00 This document is the second release of the OptiX 155/622H V300R007C00 version. The new or modified contents are as follows: About This Document OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) l The number of LAGs supported by the equipment is changed to eight. Updates in Issue 01 (2009-08-25) Based on Product Version V300R007C00 This document is the initial release of the OptiX 155/622H V300R007C00. The new or modified contents are as follows: l The description about the CXP board is added. l The introduction to the packet service and its related contents are added, such as the packet service access capability, interface types, networking modes, protection schemes, MPLS OAM, packet system performance, and the relative standards of the packet service. l The structure of the Function topic is optimized, that is, the packet domain and TDM domain are introduced respectively. l The traditional SDH clock synchronization and Ethernet synchronization are described respectively. l The Glossary and the Acronyms and Abbreviations are updated. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description About This Document Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v Contents About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Product Positioning and Product Features ...........................................................................1-1 1.1 Introduction to the OptiX 155/622H...............................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Network Position.............................................................................................................................................1-2 1.3 Product Features..............................................................................................................................................1-3 2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................2-1 2.1 Capacity...........................................................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity of the TDM Mode..........................................................................................2-2 2.1.2 Exchange Capacities..............................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.3 Access Capacity (TDM Mode)..............................................................................................................2-2 2.1.4 Slot Access Capacity (Packet Mode).....................................................................................................2-3 2.2 Service Access Capacities...............................................................................................................................2-3 2.2.1 Service Access Capability on the TDM mode.......................................................................................2-3 2.2.2 Service Access Capacity (Packet Mode)................................................................................................2-4 2.3 Interface Types................................................................................................................................................2-4 2.3.1 Types of the Service Interfaces on the TDM Mode...............................................................................2-5 2.3.2 Types of the Service Interfaces on the Packet Mode.............................................................................2-6 2.3.3 Management and Auxiliary Interfaces...................................................................................................2-6 2.4 Protection Scheme...........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.5 Clock and Time Synchronization....................................................................................................................2-8 2.5.1 Clock Synchronization...........................................................................................................................2-9 2.5.2 Synchronous Ethernet Clock..................................................................................................................2-9 2.5.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Clock Synchronization.................................................................................................2-11 2.6 License Control.............................................................................................................................................2-12 3 Product Architecture..................................................................................................................3-1 3.1 Hardware Structure.........................................................................................................................................3-3 3.1.1 Chassis....................................................................................................................................................3-3 3.1.2 Slot Allocation and Interfaces................................................................................................................3-4 3.1.3 Board Type.............................................................................................................................................3-9 3.2 SDH Unit.......................................................................................................................................................3-11 3.2.1 STM-16 Optical Interface Board OI16D..............................................................................................3-12 3.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interface Board OI4/OI4D..........................................................................................3-12 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description Contents Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii 3.2.3 STM-1 Optical Interface Board OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O...................................................................3-13 3.2.4 Single-Fiber STM-1 Interface Board SB2D/SB2L/SB2R...................................................................3-14 3.2.5 STM-1 Electrical Interface Board SDE/SLE.......................................................................................3-16 3.3 PDH Unit.......................................................................................................................................................3-17 3.3.1 E1 Electrical Interface Boards SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T...............................................3-17 3.3.2 E1/T1 Compliant Electrical Interface Board SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T...............................3-18 3.3.3 E3/T3 Electrical Interface Board PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T............................................3-19 3.4 Data Unit.......................................................................................................................................................3-20 3.4.1 Ethernet Interface Boards ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 (Supporting the ML-PPP Protocol).......................3-21 3.4.2 Ethernet Transparent Transmission Boards EFT/ELT2/EGT Boards (Supporting the GFP Protocol) .......................................................................................................................................................................3-23 3.4.3 Ethernet Switching Boards EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS (Supporting the GFP Protocol)...........................3-25 3.4.4 ATM Interface Board AIUD/AIUQ.....................................................................................................3-27 3.4.5 Nx64kbit/s Interface Board N64/N64Q/FP2D.....................................................................................3-29 3.4.6 Single Pair High-Bit-Rate Digital Subscriber Line Interface Board SHLQ........................................3-30 3.4.7 Tone and Data Access Board TDA......................................................................................................3-31 3.5 Cross-Connect and System Control Board SCB...........................................................................................3-32 3.6 Integrated Mixed-Service Processing Board CXP(Packet Mode)................................................................3-33 3.7 Environment Monitoring Unit EMU.............................................................................................................3-36 3.8 Power Converter System UPM.....................................................................................................................3-37 3.8.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................3-37 3.8.2 UPM Power Converter Box.................................................................................................................3-38 3.8.3 Storage Battery.....................................................................................................................................3-39 3.9 Software Architecture...................................................................................................................................3-40 3.9.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................................3-40 3.9.2 Communication Protocols....................................................................................................................3-41 3.9.3 Board Software.....................................................................................................................................3-41 3.9.4 NE Software.........................................................................................................................................3-42 3.9.5 Network Management System.............................................................................................................3-43 4 Data Features...............................................................................................................................4-1 4.1 Ethernet Features.............................................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................4-6 4.1.3 Protection...............................................................................................................................................4-9 4.2 ATM Features...............................................................................................................................................4-11 4.2.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................4-12 4.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................4-12 4.2.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................4-15 4.3 DDN Features................................................................................................................................................4-16 4.3.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................4-16 4.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................4-17 4.3.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................4-18 Contents OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 5 Packet Feature ............................................................................................................................5-1 5.1 MPLS.............................................................................................................................................................. 5-2 5.1.1 Background............................................................................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.2 Basic Concepts.......................................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.3 System Structure.................................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.1.4 Capability of Supporting the MPLS Technology...................................................................................5-4 5.2 Functions.........................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.3 Application......................................................................................................................................................5-7 5.3.1 Ethernet Service..................................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.3.2 CES Service............................................................................................................................................5-9 5.4 Protection......................................................................................................................................................5-10 6 Protection.....................................................................................................................................6-1 6.1 Equipment-Level Protection........................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.1 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Input Unit.............................................................................................6-2 6.1.2 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions.......................................................................6-2 6.1.3 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (TDM Mode)............................................................................ 6-3 6.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (Packet Mode)...........................................................................6-4 6.2 Network-Level Protection...............................................................................................................................6-4 6.2.1 SDH Service Protection......................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.2 Ethernet Service Protection....................................................................................................................6-6 6.2.3 ATM Service Protection.........................................................................................................................6-6 6.2.4 LPT Protection....................................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.5 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection Schemes.................................................................................... 6-8 6.2.6 PW APS Protection..............................................................................................................................6-12 7 Product and Application Scenarios........................................................................................7-1 7.1 Basic Networking Mode..................................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Typical Networking Modes on the Packet Domain........................................................................................7-2 7.3 Hybrid Networking with the OptiX PTN Equipment..................................................................................... 7-4 8 Operation and Maintenance....................................................................................................8-1 8.1 DCN Management...........................................................................................................................................8-2 8.2 Network Management.....................................................................................................................................8-4 8.3 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance...................................................................................................8-4 8.4 Power and Environment Monitoring...............................................................................................................8-5 8.5 Power Consumption Control ..........................................................................................................................8-5 8.6 Equipment Upgrade.........................................................................................................................................8-6 9 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................9-1 9.1 General Specifications of the Equipment........................................................................................................9-2 9.1.1 System Specifications............................................................................................................................ 9-2 9.1.2 Transmission Performance.....................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.3 Protection Performance..........................................................................................................................9-3 9.1.4 Environmental Specifications................................................................................................................ 9-5 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description Contents Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix 9.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility..............................................................................................................9-6 9.2 Specifications of Packet System Performance................................................................................................9-6 9.3 Specifications of Optical Interfaces................................................................................................................9-9 9.3.1 SDH Optical Interface............................................................................................................................9-9 9.3.2 Ethernet Optical Interfaces...................................................................................................................9-13 9.3.3 Colored optical interfaces.....................................................................................................................9-14 9.3.4 Wavelength Configurations..................................................................................................................9-15 9.4 Specifications of the Electrical Interface.......................................................................................................9-16 9.4.1 PDH Electrical Interface......................................................................................................................9-16 9.4.2 DDN Interface......................................................................................................................................9-17 9.4.3 Ethernet Electrical Interface.................................................................................................................9-18 9.5 Specifications of the Auxiliary Interfaces.....................................................................................................9-18 9.5.1 Specifications of the Clock Interface...................................................................................................9-19 9.5.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance...........................................................................................9-19 9.5.3 64 kbit/s Interface.................................................................................................................................9-20 9.5.4 RS-232 Interface..................................................................................................................................9-20 9.5.5 RS-422 Interface..................................................................................................................................9-21 9.5.6 Orderwire Interface..............................................................................................................................9-21 9.6 Specifications of Ethernet Features...............................................................................................................9-21 9.7 Safety Certification.......................................................................................................................................9-22 9.8 Requirements for the Environment...............................................................................................................9-23 9.8.1 Environment for Storage......................................................................................................................9-23 9.8.2 Environment for Transportation...........................................................................................................9-25 9.8.3 Environment for Operation..................................................................................................................9-28 9.9 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board..........................................................................................9-30 10 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development.................................................................10-1 10.1 Energy Saving.............................................................................................................................................10-2 10.2 Sustainable Development............................................................................................................................10-2 11 Standard Compliance............................................................................................................11-1 11.1 ITU-T Recommendations............................................................................................................................11-2 11.2 IEEE Standards...........................................................................................................................................11-4 11.3 IETF Standards............................................................................................................................................11-5 11.4 Environmental Standards............................................................................................................................11-5 11.5 Safety Compliance Standards......................................................................................................................11-6 11.6 Protection Standards....................................................................................................................................11-6 11.7 Relative Standards of the Packet Mode.......................................................................................................11-6 A Glossary and Acronyms..........................................................................................................A-1 A.1 Numerics........................................................................................................................................................A-3 A.2 A....................................................................................................................................................................A-3 A.3 B....................................................................................................................................................................A-5 A.4 C....................................................................................................................................................................A-6 Contents OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) A.5 D....................................................................................................................................................................A-9 A.6 E...................................................................................................................................................................A-10 A.7 F...................................................................................................................................................................A-12 A.8 G..................................................................................................................................................................A-13 A.9 H..................................................................................................................................................................A-14 A.10 I..................................................................................................................................................................A-15 A.11 J..................................................................................................................................................................A-16 A.12 L.................................................................................................................................................................A-16 A.13 M................................................................................................................................................................A-17 A.14 N................................................................................................................................................................A-19 A.15 O................................................................................................................................................................A-20 A.16 P.................................................................................................................................................................A-21 A.17 Q................................................................................................................................................................A-23 A.18 R................................................................................................................................................................A-23 A.19 S.................................................................................................................................................................A-25 A.20 T.................................................................................................................................................................A-28 A.21 U................................................................................................................................................................A-29 A.22 V................................................................................................................................................................A-30 A.23 W...............................................................................................................................................................A-30 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description Contents Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi Figures Figure 1-1 Front view of the OptiX 155/622H.....................................................................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Rare view of the OptiX 155/622H......................................................................................................1-2 Figure 1-3 Application of the OptiX 155/622H in a transmission network.........................................................1-3 Figure 2-1 Access Capacities of the slots on the OptiX 155/622H......................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 Access capacity when the CXP board is used....................................................................................2-3 Figure 2-3 Networking diagram of the synchronous Ethernet technology........................................................2-10 Figure 2-4 Networking of the time synchronization application........................................................................2-12 Figure 3-1 Equipment structure of the OptiX 155/622H.....................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-2 Slot layout of the OptiX 155/622H.....................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-3 System architecture of the OptiX 155/622H....................................................................................3-10 Figure 3-4 Application of the SB2R and SB2L boards......................................................................................3-16 Figure 3-5 Composition of the UPM..................................................................................................................3-37 Figure 3-6 Appearance of the power converter box...........................................................................................3-38 Figure 3-7 Rear view of the power converter box..............................................................................................3-38 Figure 3-8 Storage battery box...........................................................................................................................3-39 Figure 3-9 Storage battery tray...........................................................................................................................3-40 Figure 3-10 Software architecture......................................................................................................................3-41 Figure 4-1 PORT-based EPL service...................................................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-2 PORT-shared EVPL service...............................................................................................................4-7 Figure 4-3 VLAN ID-based EVPL service..........................................................................................................4-7 Figure 4-4 QinQ-based EVPL service..................................................................................................................4-7 Figure 4-5 EPLAN service...................................................................................................................................4-8 Figure 4-6 EVPLAN service................................................................................................................................4-9 Figure 4-7 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment by using LCAS.............................................................................4-10 Figure 4-8 Protection for the virtual concatenation group through LCAS.........................................................4-10 Figure 4-9 Application of bandwidth-exclusive ATM services.........................................................................4-14 Figure 4-10 VP/VC-Ring...................................................................................................................................4-15 Figure 5-1 Encapsulation structure of the label ...................................................................................................5-3 Figure 5-2 Encapsulation location of the labels in a packet ................................................................................5-3 Figure 5-3 Example of E-Line service.................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-4 Example of E-Aggr service................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-5 Example of E1 CES service..............................................................................................................5-10 Figure 6-1 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection....................................................................................................6-6 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description Figures Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii Figure 6-2 Point-to-point LPT..............................................................................................................................6-7 Figure 6-3 Point-to-multipoint LPT.....................................................................................................................6-8 Figure 6-4 MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection..............................................................................................................6-9 Figure 6-5 MPLS Tunnel 1:1 Protection..............................................................................................................6-9 Figure 6-6 Typical networking of PW APS 1+1 protection...............................................................................6-13 Figure 6-7 Typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection................................................................................6-13 Figure 7-1 Typical networking mode on the packet domain................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-2 Hybrid networking of the OptiX 155/622H and the OptiX PTN equipment.....................................7-4 Figures OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Tables Table 2-1 Services supported by the OptiX 155/622H and the access capability for each type of service on the TDM mode............................................................................................................................................................2-3 Table 2-2 Service access capacity of the OptiX 155/622H (packet mode)..........................................................2-4 Table 2-3 Maximum number of services in the two forms supported by the OptiX 155/622H (packet mode) ...............................................................................................................................................................................2-4 Table 2-4 Types of service interfaces provided by the OptiX 155/622H on the TDM mode..............................2-5 Table 2-5 Ethernet service interfaces and E1 service interfaces and types of the interfaces supported by the OptiX 155/622H on the packet mode...............................................................................................................................2-6 Table 2-6 Types of the management and auxiliary interfaces supported by the OptiX 155/622H......................2-6 Table 2-7 Equipment-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX 155/622H............................................2-7 Table 2-8 Network-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX 155/622H...............................................2-8 Table 3-1 SDH processing boards........................................................................................................................3-4 Table 3-2 PDH boards..........................................................................................................................................3-5 Table 3-3 Data boards...........................................................................................................................................3-7 Table 3-4 Packet boards.......................................................................................................................................3-8 Table 3-5 Cross-connect and system control boards............................................................................................3-9 Table 3-6 Auxiliary boards...................................................................................................................................3-9 Table 3-7 Power supply boards............................................................................................................................3-9 Table 3-8 Boards and functions of each unit......................................................................................................3-10 Table 3-9 Functions of the OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q and SL1O boards.....................................................................3-13 Table 3-10 Functions of the SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards............................................................................3-15 Table 3-11 Functions of the SDE and SLE boards.............................................................................................3-16 Table 3-12 Functions of the SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D and PD2T boards...........................................3-17 Table 3-13 Functions of the SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, and PM2T boards.................................................3-19 Table 3-14 Functions of the PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T boards...........................................3-20 Table 3-15 Functions of the ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards.....................................................................3-21 Table 3-16 Functions of the EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards................................................................................3-23 Table 3-17 Functions of the EFS, EFS4, EGS, and EFSC boards.....................................................................3-25 Table 3-18 ATM service types and traffic types................................................................................................3-28 Table 3-19 Functions of the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards..............................................................................3-29 Table 3-20 Transmission distances of the audio interface and data interface on the TDA board......................3-32 Table 3-21 Functional features of the CXP board..............................................................................................3-34 Table 4-1 Functions of the ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards.........................................................................4-2 Table 4-2 Functions of the EFS, EFS4, EFT, EGS, EFSC, ELT2, and EGT boards...........................................4-3 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description Tables Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv Table 4-3 Functions of the AIUD and AIUQ boards......................................................................................... 4-12 Table 4-4 ATM service types and traffic types..................................................................................................4-13 Table 4-5 Classification of ATM protection schemes........................................................................................4-15 Table 4-6 Functions of the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards................................................................................ 4-17 Table 5-1 MPLS technical features supported by the OptiX 1555/622H.............................................................5-4 Table 5-2 MPLS performance indexes supported by the OptiX 1555/622H.......................................................5-5 Table 5-3 Functional features of the CXP board..................................................................................................5-5 Table 6-1 LAG protection parameters of the Ethernet board ..............................................................................6-3 Table 6-2 LAG protection parameters of the Ethernet board ..............................................................................6-4 Table 6-3 Parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes..................................................... 6-10 Table 6-4 Parameters of PW APS protection.....................................................................................................6-14 Table 8-1 DCC resources allocation modes supported by the OptiX 155/622H..................................................8-3 Table 9-1 Weight, dimensions and power consumption......................................................................................9-2 Table 9-2 Transmission performance...................................................................................................................9-3 Table 9-3 Linear MSP parameters........................................................................................................................9-3 Table 9-4 MSP ring parameters............................................................................................................................9-4 Table 9-5 SNCP parameters.................................................................................................................................9-4 Table 9-6 Environment specifications for long-term operation...........................................................................9-5 Table 9-7 Specifications of the electromagnetic compatibility test......................................................................9-6 Table 9-8 Functional features of the CXP board..................................................................................................9-6 Table 9-9 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface......................................................................................9-9 Table 9-10 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface .................................................................................9-11 Table 9-11 Specifications of the STM-16optical interface ................................................................................9-12 Table 9-12 Permitted frequency deviation at the optical input interface............................................................9-13 Table 9-13 Bit rate error tolerance at the optical output interface......................................................................9-13 Table 9-14 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H.............................................9-14 Table 9-15 Performance specifications of the GE optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H...........................9-15 Table 9-16 Wavelength configurations of the GE colored optical interfaces.................................................... 9-15 Table 9-17 Bit rate error tolerance at the electrical output interface..................................................................9-16 Table 9-18 Permitted attenuation at the electrical input interface......................................................................9-17 Table 9-19 Permitted Frequency Deviation at the electrical input interface......................................................9-17 Table 9-20 Anti-interference capability of the electrical input interface........................................................... 9-17 Table 9-21 Specifications of DDN interfaces.....................................................................................................9-17 Table 9-22 Specifications of the electrical interfaces.........................................................................................9-18 Table 9-23 Specifications of the clock interface................................................................................................ 9-19 Table 9-24 Specifications of the clock interface over the synchronous Ethernet...............................................9-19 Table 9-25 Timing and Synchronization Performance.......................................................................................9-19 Table 9-26 Timing and synchronization performance of IEEE 1588 V2 clock synchronization...................... 9-20 Table 9-27 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface...........................................................................................9-20 Table 9-28 Specifications of the RS-232 interface.............................................................................................9-20 Table 9-29 Specifications of the RS-422 interface.............................................................................................9-21 Table 9-30 Specifications of the orderwire interface......................................................................................... 9-21 Tables OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 9-31 Test specifications of the single-port 10M bidirectional full-duplex feature...................................9-22 Table 9-32 Test specifications of the single-port 100M bidirectional full-duplex feature.................................9-22 Table 9-33 Safety certifications..........................................................................................................................9-23 Table 9-34 Requirements on the climate for storage..........................................................................................9-24 Table 9-35 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the storage environment..............9-24 Table 9-36 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the storage environment..................9-25 Table 9-37 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the storage environment................................................9-25 Table 9-38 Requirements on the climate for transportation...............................................................................9-26 Table 9-39 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the transportation environment .............................................................................................................................................................................9-26 Table 9-40 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the transportation environment.......9-27 Table 9-41 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the transportation environment.....................................9-27 Table 9-42 Requirements on the temperature and relative humidity.................................................................9-28 Table 9-43 Other requirements on the climate...................................................................................................9-28 Table 9-44 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the operation environment..........9-29 Table 9-45 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the operation environment..............9-29 Table 9-46 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the operation environment............................................9-30 Table 9-47 Power consumption and weight of each board................................................................................9-30 Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations..................................................................................................................11-2 Table 11-2 IEEE standards.................................................................................................................................11-4 Table 11-3 IETF standards.................................................................................................................................11-5 Table 11-4 Environmental standards .................................................................................................................11-5 Table 11-5 Safety compliance standards............................................................................................................11-6 Table 11-6 Protection standards.........................................................................................................................11-6 Table 11-7 Relative standards of the packet mode and their description ..........................................................11-6 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description Tables Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii 1 Product Positioning and Product Features About This Chapter The OptiX 155/622H is a type of STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 case-shaped equipment developed by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. (hereafter referred to as Huawei). The OptiX 155/622H is mainly used at the access layer of metropolitan area networks (MANs) and local transmission networks, with the features of simple architecture and high integration. 1.1 Introduction to the OptiX 155/622H The OptiX 155/622H is new-generation optical transmission equipment, which is developed by Huawei for the access layer. 1.2 Network Position The OptiX 155/622H can access multiple types of services and can be used at the access layer of metropolitan area networks (MANs) and local transmission networks to access VIP private lines, wireless base stations, and digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAMs). 1.3 Product Features The OptiX 155/622H features simple architecture and high integration. It supports the TDM and packet domains and therefore can be interconnected with the packet switching equipment. In addition, it supports circuit emulation service (CES) services, which realizes direct access of E1 services on the packet domain. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 1 Product Positioning and Product Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-1 1.1 Introduction to the OptiX 155/622H The OptiX 155/622H is new-generation optical transmission equipment, which is developed by Huawei for the access layer. The OptiX 155/622H is a type of case-shaped equipment. The dimensions of the chassis are: 436 mm (W) x 293 mm (D) x 86 mm (H). Except for the power supply module and certain service boards, the cross-connect unit, clock unit, and orderwire units are integrated into the SCB board. Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the appearance of the OptiX 155/622H. Figure 1-1 Front view of the OptiX 155/622H
Figure 1-2 Rare view of the OptiX 155/622H
1.2 Network Position The OptiX 155/622H can access multiple types of services and can be used at the access layer of metropolitan area networks (MANs) and local transmission networks to access VIP private lines, wireless base stations, and digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAMs). In the case of Ethernet services, the OptiX 155/622H supports transmitting services on the following two domains on a network: the traditional time division multiplexing (TDM) domain and the packet transport network domain. In the case of Ethernet services on the packet domain, the OptiX 155/622H provides a small- scale convergence function. Specifically, the equipment converges services from multiple FE ports into one GE port. In the case that the TDM domain and the packet domain are supported on the same network, a smooth migration from the TDM network to the packet network can be achieved. Figure 1-3 shows the application of the OptiX 155/622H in a network. 1 Product Positioning and Product Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Figure 1-3 Application of the OptiX 155/622H in a transmission network Backbone layer Convergence layer Access layer OptiX OSN 9500 OptiX OSN 7500 OptiX 155/622H OptiX OSN 500 OptiX OSN 500 OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX 155/622H OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 7500
1.3 Product Features The OptiX 155/622H features simple architecture and high integration. It supports the TDM and packet domains and therefore can be interconnected with the packet switching equipment. In addition, it supports circuit emulation service (CES) services, which realizes direct access of E1 services on the packet domain. Simple Architecture and High Integration The OptiX 155/622H is a type of case-shaped equipment. The dimensions of the chassis are: 436 mm (W) x 293 mm (D) x 86 mm (H). Except for the power supply module and certain service boards, the cross-connect unit, clock unit, and orderwire units are integrated into the SCB board. Dual-Domain Architecture and Multi-Service Transmission The OptiX 155/622H supports service bearing on the time division multiplexing (TDM) domain and the packet transport network domain. With dual-domain networking, the OptiX 155/622H achieves smooth evolution from TDM network to PSN. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 1 Product Positioning and Product Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-3 Support for the CES Technology and Flexible Networking The OptiX 155/622H supports the CES technology. With the CES technology, the OptiX 155/622H can directly access E1 TDM services to the pure packet domain. In this manner, the TDM domain smoothly evolves into the packet domain. 1 Product Positioning and Product Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 2 Functions and Features About This Chapter The OptiX 155/622H provides the features of the traditional optical network equipment and supports various network-level protection schemes and NMS monitoring. 2.1 Capacity Capacities are classified in to the cross-connect capacity and the access capacity. 2.2 Service Access Capacities The service processing capacities of the OptiX 155/622H include the service access capacity. 2.3 Interface Types The external interfaces of the OptiX 155/622H include the service interfaces, and management and auxiliary interfaces. 2.4 Protection Scheme The OptiX 155/622H provides the equipment-level protection schemes, and the comprehensive network-level protection schemes for multiple types of services. 2.5 Clock and Time Synchronization The OptiX 155/622H supports the tracking of various types of clock sources and supports the clock synchronization in the SSM management. In addition, the OptiX 155/622H supports high precision time synchronization, which complies with the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. 2.6 License Control Licenses include version licenses and feature licenses. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Functions and Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-1 2.1 Capacity Capacities are classified in to the cross-connect capacity and the access capacity. 2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity of the TDM Mode On the TDM mode, the cross-connect capacity supported by the OptiX 155/622H is classified into higher order cross-connect capacity and lower order cross-connect capacity. 2.1.2 Exchange Capacities On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports service exchange based on the packets. 2.1.3 Access Capacity (TDM Mode) Seven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H. Different slots should house corresponding boards. 2.1.4 Slot Access Capacity (Packet Mode) Seven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H. Different slots house corresponding boards. 2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity of the TDM Mode On the TDM mode, the cross-connect capacity supported by the OptiX 155/622H is classified into higher order cross-connect capacity and lower order cross-connect capacity. On the OptiX 155/622H, the cross-connect board SCB supports a higher order cross-connect capacity of 21.25 Gbit/s (that is, 136x136 VC-4) and a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s (that is, 32x32 VC-4). 2.1.2 Exchange Capacities On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports service exchange based on the packets. The exchange capacity of packets supported by the OptiX 155/622H is 8 Gbit/s. 2.1.3 Access Capacity (TDM Mode) Seven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H. Different slots should house corresponding boards. On the TDM mode, the access capacities of the slots on the OptiX 155/622H are as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Access Capacities of the slots on the OptiX 155/622H F A N P O I SCB 5G(IU5) +32M(IU6) IU4622M IU31.25G IU21.25G IU11.25G
2 Functions and Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 2.1.4 Slot Access Capacity (Packet Mode) Seven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H. Different slots house corresponding boards. When slot IU4 houses the CXP board on the OptiX 155/622H, the access capacity of each slot is as shown in Figure 2-2. Figure 2-2 Access capacity when the CXP board is used F A N P O I SCB 5G(IU5) +32M(IU6) CXP5G IU31.25G IU21.25G IU11.25G
2.2 Service Access Capacities The service processing capacities of the OptiX 155/622H include the service access capacity. 2.2.1 Service Access Capability on the TDM mode On the TDM mode, the OptiX 155/622H can access multiple types of services and can be interconnected with switches, wireless base stations, and Ethernet switches. 2.2.2 Service Access Capacity (Packet Mode) On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports access of the FE services, GE services, and CES services, and can be interconnected with the equipment where the packet feature is enabled. 2.2.1 Service Access Capability on the TDM mode On the TDM mode, the OptiX 155/622H can access multiple types of services and can be interconnected with switches, wireless base stations, and Ethernet switches. Table 2-1 lists the services that the OptiX 155/622H can access and the access capability for each type of service on the TDM mode. Table 2-1 Services supported by the OptiX 155/622H and the access capability for each type of service on the TDM mode Service Type Maximum Access Capability of a Single OptiX 155/622H NE SDH 16xSTM-1 (o), 6xSTM-1 (e), 8xSTM-4 (o), 2xSTM-16 (o) PDH 112xE1, 72xE1, 9xE3/T3 Ethernet 24xFE (e), 8xFE (o), 3xGE (o) DDN service 12xNx64 kbit/s (N 31), 48xFramed E1, Nx2.4kbit/s (N 18) SHDSL 12xSHDSL (E1, Nx64 kbit/s) ATM 4xSTM-1 ATM OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Functions and Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-3 Service Type Maximum Access Capability of a Single OptiX 155/622H NE Audio and data 12xaudio + 4xRS-232 + 4xRS-422
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity (Packet Mode) On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports access of the FE services, GE services, and CES services, and can be interconnected with the equipment where the packet feature is enabled. On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H can access the FE and GE services in two service forms (that is, E-Line, E-Aggr, and CES). Table 2-2 lists the service access capacity of the OptiX 155/622H. Table 2-2 Service access capacity of the OptiX 155/622H (packet mode) Service Type Maximum Access Capacity of One Set of the Equipment FE 2xFE (o) + 4xFE (e) GE 4xGE (o)
Table 2-3 lists the maximum number of services in the two forms supported by the OptiX 155/622H. Table 2-3 Maximum number of services in the two forms supported by the OptiX 155/622H (packet mode) Service Forms Maximum Number of Services E-Line 1024 E-Aggr 4 E1 CES 16
2.3 Interface Types The external interfaces of the OptiX 155/622H include the service interfaces, and management and auxiliary interfaces. 2.3.1 Types of the Service Interfaces on the TDM Mode On the TDM mode, the OptiX 155/622H provides multiple types of interfaces for SDH services, PDH services, and Ethernet services. 2.3.2 Types of the Service Interfaces on the Packet Mode On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H mainly provides Ethernet service interfaces and E1 service interfaces. 2 Functions and Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 2.3.3 Management and Auxiliary Interfaces The management and auxiliary interfaces include the management interfaces, external clock interfaces, and alarm interfaces. 2.3.1 Types of the Service Interfaces on the TDM Mode On the TDM mode, the OptiX 155/622H provides multiple types of interfaces for SDH services, PDH services, and Ethernet services. Table 2-4 lists the types of the service interfaces provided by the OptiX 155/622H. Table 2-4 Types of service interfaces provided by the OptiX 155/622H on the TDM mode Interface Type Description Connector Type SDH service STM-1 optical interface, supporting the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical interface types SC/LC STM-1 optical interface, supporting the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical interface types that use a single fiber for transmitting and receiving SC STM-4 optical interface, supporting the Ie-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 optical interface types SC/LC STM-16 optical interface, supporting the S-16.1 optical interface type LC STM-1 electrical interface SMB PDH service E1/T1 electrical interface 2 mm HM connector Framed E1 electrical interface DB78 connector E3/T3 electrical interface SMB Ethernet service 10Base-T, 100Base-TX RJ-45 100Base-FX LC 1000Base-SX/LX LC ATM service STM-1 optical interface LC Audio and data service RS-232 or RS-422 data and audio interface 2mm HM connector DDN service Physical interface complying with multiple protocols, including V.35, V.24, X.21, RS-449, and EIA-530 2 mm HM connector Framed E1 electrical interface 2 mm HM connector OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Functions and Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-5 Interface Type Description Connector Type G.SHDSL Single pair high-bit-rate digital subscriber line interface RJ-11
2.3.2 Types of the Service Interfaces on the Packet Mode On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H mainly provides Ethernet service interfaces and E1 service interfaces. Table 2-5 provides the Ethernet service interfaces and E1 service interfaces and types of the interfaces supported by the OptiX 155/622H on the packet mode. Table 2-5 Ethernet service interfaces and E1 service interfaces and types of the interfaces supported by the OptiX 155/622H on the packet mode Interface Interface Type Connector Type FE 100Base-TX RJ-45 100Base-FX LC GE 1000Base-SX/LX/VX/ZX LC E1 75/120 ohms 2 mm HM connector
2.3.3 Management and Auxiliary Interfaces The management and auxiliary interfaces include the management interfaces, external clock interfaces, and alarm interfaces. Table 2-6 provides the types of the management and auxiliary interfaces supported by the OptiX 155/622H. Table 2-6 Types of the management and auxiliary interfaces supported by the OptiX 155/622H Interface Type Description Connector Type Clock interface An external clock interface that supports clock signals. The impedance of the interface is 120 ohms. The mode can be set to 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz. RJ-45 2 Functions and Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Interface Type Description Connector Type Time interface A time reference output interface that supports 1 pps (that is, second pulse) and time information. 1 pps and the time serial port use the RS-422 level. RJ-45 Power supply interface Two-channel -48 V/-60 V DC power supply interface Two-channel +24 V DC power supply interface Four-core socket Environment monitoring interface The EMU board provides: l 12-channel housekeeping signal input interface and six-channel housekeeping signal output interface l One-channel RS-232/RS-422 serial communication interface 2 mm HM connector The SCB board provides: l Four-channel housekeeping signal input interfaces and two housekeeping signal output interfaces l Four-channel transparent data interfaces RJ-45 Management interface One-channel modem interface RJ-45 One-channel NM interface RJ-45 Orderwire interface One orderwire phone interface RJ-11
2.4 Protection Scheme The OptiX 155/622H provides the equipment-level protection schemes, and the comprehensive network-level protection schemes for multiple types of services. Table 2-7 provides multiple equipment-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX 155/622H. Table 2-7 Equipment-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX 155/622H Protected Object Protection Mode POI/POU board 1+1 hot backup for the power supply OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Functions and Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-7 Protected Object Protection Mode Abnormal board Power failure protection during software loading, overvoltage and undervoltage protection for power supply, and software upgrade protection. FP2D PPS protection Ethernet board port (TDM mode) LAG protection Ethernet board port (packet mode)
Table 2-8 provides multiple network-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX 155/622H. Table 2-8 Network-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX 155/622H Network Layer Protection Mode SDH on the TDM mode Linear multiplex section protection (LMSP) Ring MSP Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) Protection for inter-ring services Fiber-shared virtual path protection Ethernet on the TDM mode Layered protection Ethernet on the packet mode l MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection l MPLS PW 1+1/1:1 protection ATM on the TDM mode VP-ring/VC-ring protection
2.5 Clock and Time Synchronization The OptiX 155/622H supports the tracking of various types of clock sources and supports the clock synchronization in the SSM management. In addition, the OptiX 155/622H supports high precision time synchronization, which complies with the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. 2.5.1 Clock Synchronization The OptiX 155/622H provides clock functions such as multiple synchronous clock sources and clock management. 2.5.2 Synchronous Ethernet Clock The OptiX 155/622H supports the synchronous Ethernet clock at the physical layer. 2.5.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Clock Synchronization The OptiX 155/622H provides the function of high precision time synchronization, which meets the requirement of the equipment for precise time synchronization. The time information is 2 Functions and Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) accessed into the SDH network and is then transmitted to the equipment that requires precise time, such as NodeB. 2.5.1 Clock Synchronization The OptiX 155/622H provides clock functions such as multiple synchronous clock sources and clock management. The OptiX 155/622H supports the following clock functions: l Input and output of two external clock sources with an interface impedance of 120 ohms. The 75-ohm interface can be provided by using a converter. l Line clock source. l Tributary clock source. l Non Synchronization Status Message (SSM), standard SSM, and extended SSM protocols. l Tributary re-timing. l Three clock working modes: locked, holdover and free-run. 2.5.2 Synchronous Ethernet Clock The OptiX 155/622H supports the synchronous Ethernet clock at the physical layer. Concepts and Features In the case of the physical layer clock synchronization mechanism, clock signals are extracted from signals on the physical channel of the transmission link and thus the frequency synchronization is achieved. The synchronous Ethernet is a synchronization technology that is used to synchronize the clock frequency at the physical layer. The synchronous Ethernet is similar to the SDH clock. The system can directly extract the clock signal from the serial bit stream on the Ethernet line and transmit the clock signal to each board. In this manner, the transmission of the clock signal is realized. The features of the synchronous Ethernet clock are as follows: l The realization of the synchronous Ethernet clock technology is simple. To be specific, the port can directly extract the physical layer clock and the quality of the clock meets the requirement of the clock source (that is, the clock standard of the synchronous Ethernet). l The synchronization status information (SSM) is used to indicate the quality level of the clock. The SSM is carried by the specific OAM packet. l To transmit the synchronous Ethernet clock signal, each network node that the synchronous information travels through must support the synchronous Ethernet technology. Capability of the Synchronous Ethernet Technology The following boards support the synchronous Ethernet technology on the OptiX 155/622H: l Ethernet board EFS4 l Integrated mixed-service processing board CXP OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Functions and Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-9 Networking Diagram The OptiX 155/622H provides synchronous Ethernet interfaces to form a synchronous Ethernet network that can realize Ethernet synchronization at the physical layer. Figure 2-3 shows the application of the synchronous Ethernet technology. Figure 2-3 Networking diagram of the synchronous Ethernet technology ~ PRC Clock information RNC BSC Node B OptiX 155/622H/OptiX OSN 1500 FE TDM domain Packet domain ~ PRC RNC BSC OptiX OSN 3500 Convergence/Core layer Access layer STM-16/64 ring 10GE ring STM-1/4 ring GE ring
The clock signal is transmitted on the synchronous Ethernet as follows: 1. The clock information on the primary reference clock (PRC) or other external clock equipment is transmitted through the external clock interface and then arrives at the OptiX 155/622H on the synchronous Ethernet. 2. Through the synchronous Ethernet interface on the data board that supports the synchronous Ethernet technology on the OptiX 155/622H, the clock signal is extracted from the serial code stream in the Ethernet physical layer line and the clock source is selected. 2 Functions and Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 3. Through the synchronous Ethernet interface, the extracted clock signal is transmitted to the NodeB, BSC, or RNC. In this manner, the transmission of the synchronous Ethernet clock signal is realized. 4. Inside the OptiX 155/622H, the clock phase-locked loop traces one of the Ethernet line clocks and generates the system clock. 5. Through the corresponding interface of the data board, the system clock is transmitted to the downstream boards. 2.5.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Clock Synchronization The OptiX 155/622H provides the function of high precision time synchronization, which meets the requirement of the equipment for precise time synchronization. The time information is accessed into the SDH network and is then transmitted to the equipment that requires precise time, such as NodeB. The OptiX 155/622H can input and output the time information through the Ethernet interface of the data board. In addition, it can also output the time information by multiplexing through the SYNC external clock interface and the COM3 and COM4 transparent data ports of the SCB board. The time information is carried by the line board or data board for synchronizing the time in the entire network. The following boards of the OptiX 155/622H support the time synchronization function: l System control board SS49SCB l Line boards OI2S, OI2D, OI4, OI4D, and OI16D l Ethernet interface board EFS4 l Integrated mixed-service processing board CXP Figure 2-4 shows the networking of the time synchronization application. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Functions and Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-11 Figure 2-4 Networking of the time synchronization application ~ A Intermediate equipment of time synchronization 2.5G link E Clock source PRC B C 155M link G Access layer Convergence layer F 622M link 10G ring D Intermediate equipment of time synchronization Intermediate equipment of time synchronization Intermediate equipment of time synchronization Intermediate equipment of time synchronization Intermediate equipment of time synchronization Intermediate equipment of time synchronization Intermediate equipment of time synchronization Slave equipment of time synchronization Slave equipment of time synchronization Slave equipment of time synchronization ~ Clock source PRC Clock information + Time information OptiX 155/622H OptiX OS equipment Clock information ~ GPS Clock information + Time information ~ GPS
2.6 License Control Licenses include version licenses and feature licenses. License The product of this version is released with a license. That is, customers can obtain corresponding rights committed by the supplier based on the license certificate. After you purchase the license, you need to load or update the license file. l At the deployment phase: You can configure or use the new features of this version only after the license file of this version is loaded. l At the maintenance phase: You can query the license status and use period on the NMS; you need to apply for a new license after the SCC boards are replaced; the services with the features controlled can be queried and deleted but cannot be added, modified, or enabled 2 Functions and Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) after the licence expires; you need to purchase a new license if the features that you purchase are increased. Feature License In the case of the version, a license file needs to be purchased to enable the time synchronization feature of IEEE 1588v2. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Functions and Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-13 3 Product Architecture About This Chapter This topic describes the hardware structure and software architecture of the OptiX 155/622H. 3.1 Hardware Structure This topic describes the equipment structure, slot allocation, boards, and power converter system. 3.2 SDH Unit The OptiX 155/622H provides the following types of SDH interface boards: STM-1 optical interface board, STM-4 optical interface board, STM-16 optical interface board, and STM-1 electrical interface board. The SDH interface board receives and transmits STM-1 optical signals, STM-4 optical signals, STM-16 optical signals and STM-1 electrical signals, processes section overheads and higher order path overheads, and interprets pointers as defined in ITU-T G.783. In addition, the SDH interface board provides synchronous clock sources for the clock unit. 3.3 PDH Unit The OptiX 155/622H provides the following types of PDH interface boards: E1 electrical interface board, E1/T1 electrical interface board, and E3/T3 electrical interface board. The PDH interface board receives and transmits PDH service signals, and provides synchronous clock sources for the clock unit. 3.4 Data Unit The OptiX 155/622H provides various Ethernet interface boards to receive and transmit FE and GE service signals. 3.5 Cross-Connect and System Control Board SCB The SCB board integrates the functions of the line, tributary, cross-connect, clock, time, SCC, and orderwire modules. 3.6 Integrated Mixed-Service Processing Board CXP(Packet Mode) The CXP board mainly provides the packet data transmission function, and can access the FE and GE services when working with the SCB board. 3.7 Environment Monitoring Unit EMU The EMU board monitors the environment. 3.8 Power Converter System UPM OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-1 The uninterruptible power module (UPM) is a 220 V AC to -48 V DC power converter system that is used only by the OptiX 155/622H. The UPM consists of the double-channel hot backup AC/DC converter module, monitoring module, and storage battery. 3.9 Software Architecture 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 3.1 Hardware Structure This topic describes the equipment structure, slot allocation, boards, and power converter system. 3.1.1 Chassis This topic describes the appearance of the equipment and provides the dimensions and weight of the equipment. 3.1.2 Slot Allocation and Interfaces Seven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H for installing boards. 3.1.3 Board Type With the cross-connect unit working as the core unit, the OptiX 155/622H consists of the SDH interface unit, PDH interface unit, Ethernet interface unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, SCC unit, and orderwire unit. 3.1.1 Chassis This topic describes the appearance of the equipment and provides the dimensions and weight of the equipment. The OptiX 155/622H adopts a case-shaped structure with the dimensions of 436 mm (W) x 293 mm (D) x 86 mm (H). The OptiX 155/622H is designed in compliance with the standards of the 19-inch cabinet. In the maximum configuration, the weight of the OptiX 155/622H is not more than 10 kg, and the maximum power consumption is not more than 100 W. The OptiX 155/622H consists of a chassis, fan board, power filter board, air filter, and the boards installed in the board area. See Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 Equipment structure of the OptiX 155/622H Assembly Fan board Board area Power filter board and air filter
l Fan board: It is used for the heat dissipation of the equipment. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-3 l Air filter and power filter board: The air filter together with the fan board is used for the ventilation and heat dissipation of the equipment. The power filter board inputs power for the equipment. l Board area: It houses service boards and system control board, and provides various service interfaces and monitoring and management interfaces. NOTE If the power consumption of the hardware configuration exceeds 100 W, the system may become unstable. 3.1.2 Slot Allocation and Interfaces Seven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H for installing boards. Figure 3-2 shows the slot layout of the OptiX 155/622H and Table 3-1 lists the available boards. Figure 3-2 Slot layout of the OptiX 155/622H F A N P O I SCB slot IU4 IU3 IU2 IU1
Table 3-1 SDH processing boards Board Name Full Name Valid Slot Interface Type Connector OI2S 1xSTM-1 optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2 SC/LC OI2D 2xSTM-1 optical interface board IU1, IU2, IU3, IU5 a Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 SC/LC SL1O 8xSTM-1 optical interface board IU4 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 SC/LC SL1Q 4xSTM-1 optical interface board IU4 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 SC/LC OI4 1xSTM-4 optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 Ie-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 SC/LC OI4D 2xSTM-4 optical interface board IU1, IU2, IU3, IU5 a Ie-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 SC/LC 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Board Name Full Name Valid Slot Interface Type Connector OI16D 2xSTM-16 optical interface board IU5 a S-16.1 LC SB2L 1xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 S-1.1, L-1.1 SC (Only the left optical interface is available.) SB2R 1xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 S-1.1, L-1.1 SC (Only the right optical interface is available.) SB2D 2xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 S-1.1, L-1.1 SC SLE 1xSTM-1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75-ohm STM-1 interface 75-ohm SMB co-axial interface SDE 2xSTM-1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75-ohm STM-1 interface 75-ohm SMB co-axial interface a: IU5 and IU6 are logical slots that are integrated on the SCB board.
Table 3-2 PDH boards Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot Interface Type Connector SP1S 4xE1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75/120-ohm E1 interface 2 mmHM connector SP1D 8xE1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75/120-ohm E1 interface 2 mmHM connector SP2D 16xE1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, IU3, IU6 a 75/120-ohm E1 interface 2 mmHM connector PD2S 16xE1 electrical interface board IU4 75/120-ohm E1 interface 2 mmHM connector PD2D 32xE1 electrical interface board IU4 75/120-ohm E1 interface 2 mmHM connector OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-5 Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot Interface Type Connector PD2T 48xE1 electrical interface board IU4 75/120-ohm E1 interface 2 mmHM connector SM1S 4xE1/T1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75/120-ohm E1 interface or 100- ohm T1 interface 2 mmHM connector SM1D 8xE1/T1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75/120-ohm E1 interface or 100- ohm T1 interface 2 mmHM connector PM2S 16xE1/T1 electrical interface board IU4 75/120-ohm E1 interface or 100- ohm T1 interface 2 mmHM connector PM2D 32xE1/T1 electrical interface board IU4 75/120-ohm E1 interface or 100- ohm T1 interface 2 mmHM connector PM2T 48xE1/T1 electrical interface board IU4 75/120-ohm E1 interface or 100- ohm T1 interface 2 mmHM connector PE3S 1xE3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75-ohm E3 interface SMB co-axial connector PE3D 2xE3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75-ohm E3 interface SMB co-axial connector PE3T 3xE3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75-ohm E3 interface SMB co-axial connector PT3S 1xT3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75-ohm T3 interface SMB co-axial connector PT3D 2xT3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75-ohm T3 interface SMB co-axial connector PT3T 3xT3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 75-ohm T3 interface SMB co-axial connector a: IU5 and IU6 are logical slots that are integrated on the SCB board.
3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 3-3 Data boards Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot Interface Type Connector ET1 8xEthernet service interface board IU4 10/100BASE-T RJ-45 ET1O 8xEthernet service electrical interface board IU4 10/100BASE-T RJ-45 ET1D 2xEthernet service electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 10/100BASE-T RJ-45 EF1 6xEthernet service interface board IU4 10/100Base-T, 100Base-FX RJ-45 EFS 4xEthernet service interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 10/100BASE-T RJ-45 EFS4 4xEthernet service interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 100BASE-T RJ-45 EGS 1xGE optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 1000BASE-LX/ SX LC EFSC 12xEthernet service interface board IU4 10/100BASE-T RJ-45 EFT 4xEthernet service interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 10/100BASE-T RJ-45 ELT2 2xFE optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 S-1.1, Ie-1 LC EGT 1xGE Ethernet transparent transmission board IU1, IU2, and IU3 1000BASE-LX/ SX LC AIUD 2xATM optical interface board IU4 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 Single-mode LC, multi-mode MT-RJ AIUQ 4xATM optical interface board IU4 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 Single-mode LC, multi-mode MT-RJ OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-7 Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot Interface Type Connector SHLQ Single-line-pair high-bit-rate digital subscriber line interface IU1, IU2, and IU3 RJ-11 connector, two- wire twisted pair N64 Nx64 kbit/s interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 Nx64 kbit/s interfaces: V. 35, V.24, X.21, RS-449, EIA-530 Framed E1 interfaces: CRC4, non- CRC4 2 mmHM N64Q 4-channel Nx64 kbit/s interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 Nx64 kbit/s interfaces: V. 35, X.21, RS-449, V.24, RS-530, RS-530A 2 mmHM FP2D 16xFramed E1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3 Framed E1 interfaces: CRC4, non- CRC4 DB78 TDA Multi-channel tone & data access board IU4 12-channel audio+4- channel RS-232 +4-channel RS-422 2 mmHM connector
Table 3-4 Packet boards Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot Interface Type Connector CXP Integrated mixed-service processing board IU4 100Base-TX, 1000Base-SX/ LX/VX/ZX RJ-45, LC
3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 3-5 Cross-connect and system control boards Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot Interface Type Connector SCB System control board SCB S-1.1, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1, 75/120- ohm E1 interfaces SC, LC, 2 mmHM
Table 3-6 Auxiliary boards Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot Interface Type Connector EMU Power and environment monitoring unit IU3 2-channel voltage monitoring, temperature monitoring, 12/6-channel alarm inputs/ outputs, 1- channel RS-232/RS-422 serial communication interface - FAN Fan board FAN - -
Table 3-7 Power supply boards Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot Interface Type Connector POI/POU Filtering board POI/POU H2X2(4.20) H2(5.08) UPM(CAU) Power monitoring unit External component - -
3.1.3 Board Type With the cross-connect unit working as the core unit, the OptiX 155/622H consists of the SDH interface unit, PDH interface unit, Ethernet interface unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, SCC unit, and orderwire unit. Figure 3-3 shows the system architecture of the OptiX 155/622H. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-9 Figure 3-3 System architecture of the OptiX 155/622H IU1 Clock unit External clock interface NM interface Orderwire phone Cross-connect unit STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1, E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet SCC unit Orderwire unit IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1, E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1, E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 E1 STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1, E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1, E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1, E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet STM-1, E1, E1/T1, ATM, Ethernet E1 STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 STM-1, E1, E1/T1, ATM, Ethernet
NOTE The boards that need to be inserted in slots IU5 and IU6 are integrated on the SCB board. Table 3-8 Boards and functions of each unit Unit Board Function SDH interface unit OI16D, OI2S, OI2D, SL1O, SL1Q, OI4, OI4D, SB2L, SB2R, SB2D, SLE, and SDE l Accesses and processes STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical signals. l Accesses and processes STM-1 electrical signals. PDH interface unit SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D, PD2T, SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, PM2T, PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T Accesses and processes E1, E1/T1, E3, and T3 PDH electrical signals. Ethernet service processing unit ET1, ET1O, ET1D, EF1, EFS, EFS4, EFSC, EGS, EFT, ELT2, EGT, CXP Accesses and processes 10/100BASE-T(X), 100BASE-FX, and 1000BASE-LX/SX/VX/ZX Ethernet signals. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Unit Board Function Data service processing unit SHLQ, N64, N64Q, FP2D, TDA l Accesses and processes Nx64 kbit/s (N is 1-32) signals, Framed E1 signals, and Unframed E1 signals. l Implements the cross- connection for the Nx64 kbit/s signals on the system side. l Accesses and processes Nx2.4 kbit/s (N = 1-18) services. ATM service processing unit AIUD and AIUQ Accesses and processes ATM signals. System control and communication unit SCB l Provides the interface for connecting the equipment to the NM. l Processes the overheads of SDH signals. l Processes orderwire signals. l Processes clock signals. l Implements the cross- connection. l Processes broadcast data services. l Processes E1 signals and STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical signals. Environment monitoring unit EMU Monitors the operating voltage and operating temperature of the equipment, supports the input and output of housekeeping signals, and supports serial communication. Power input unit POI/POU Provides the power supply.
3.2 SDH Unit The OptiX 155/622H provides the following types of SDH interface boards: STM-1 optical interface board, STM-4 optical interface board, STM-16 optical interface board, and STM-1 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-11 electrical interface board. The SDH interface board receives and transmits STM-1 optical signals, STM-4 optical signals, STM-16 optical signals and STM-1 electrical signals, processes section overheads and higher order path overheads, and interprets pointers as defined in ITU-T G.783. In addition, the SDH interface board provides synchronous clock sources for the clock unit. The OptiX 155/622H provides the following SDH interface boards. 3.2.1 STM-16 Optical Interface Board OI16D The OI16D board accesses STM-16 optical signals and is currently integrated on SCB. 3.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interface Board OI4/OI4D The OI4 and OI4D boards access STM-4 optical signals. 3.2.3 STM-1 Optical Interface Board OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O The OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q, and SL1O boards access STM-1 signals. 3.2.4 Single-Fiber STM-1 Interface Board SB2D/SB2L/SB2R The SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards access single-fiber STM-1 optical signals. 3.2.5 STM-1 Electrical Interface Board SDE/SLE The SDE and SLE boards access STM-1 electrical signals. 3.2.1 STM-16 Optical Interface Board OI16D The OI16D board accesses STM-16 optical signals and is currently integrated on SCB. Functions l Accesses STM-16 optical signals. l Provides the S-16.1 optical interface. l Provides two synchronous clock sources for the clock unit. l Supports the SNCP and MSP. l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. l Provides data communication channel (DCC) and orderwire communication. l Supports inloop and outloop. l The optical interface on the OI16D board supports the LC connector. Using the LC connector can facilitate the maintenance for optical modules. Application When the OptiX 155/622H uses the OI16D board, the equipment can implement the following functions: l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-16 rate. l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-16 rate with other Huawei equipment, such as the OptiX 155/622 and the OptiX 2500+. l Provides STM-16 optical interfaces for interconnection with third-party equipment. 3.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interface Board OI4/OI4D The OI4 and OI4D boards access STM-4 optical signals. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Functions l Accesses STM-4 optical signals. l Provides optical interfaces: Ie-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2. l OI4D provides two synchronous clock sources for the clock unit and OI4 provides one. l Supports MSP and SNCP. l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. l Provides data communication channels (DCCs) and orderwire communication. l Supports inloop and outloop. l The optical interface on the OI4/OI4D board supports the SC connector and LC connector. Select the proper connector type according to different requirements. Using the LC connector can facilitate the maintenance of optical modules. Application When the OptiX 155/622H uses the OI4 board or the OI4D board, the equipment can implement the following functions: l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-4 rate. l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-4 rate with other Huawei equipment, such as the OptiX 155/622 and the OptiX 2500+. l Provides STM-4 optical interfaces for interconnection with third-party equipment. 3.2.3 STM-1 Optical Interface Board OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O The OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q, and SL1O boards access STM-1 signals. Functions l Accesses STM-1 optical signals. l Provides four types of optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2. l The OI2S and OI2D boards can provide the synchronous clock source for the clock unit. l Supports MSP and SNCP. l Supports the ALS function. l Provides DCCs communication. l The OI2S/OI2D/SL1O boards provides orderwire communication. l Supports inloop and outloop. l The OI2S and OI2D boards supports the pluggable optical module. Table 3-9 lists the functions of the OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q, and SL1O boards. Table 3-9 Functions of the OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q and SL1O boards Item OI2S OI2D SL1Q SL1O Number of interfaces 1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1 4xSTM-1 8xSTM-1 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-13 Item OI2S OI2D SL1Q SL1O Optical interface type Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU5 a IU4 IU4 Type of connector SC/LC SC/LC SC SC Number of synchronous clock sources 1 2 - - DCC communicati on D1-D3 and D4-D12 D1-D3 and D4-D12 D1-D3 D1-D3 a: The IU5 is a logical slot that is integrated on the SCB board.
Application When the OptiX 155/622H uses the STM-1 optical interface board, the equipment can implement the following functions: l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-1 rate. l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-1 rate with other Huawei equipment, such as the OptiX 155/622 and the OptiX 2500+. l Provides STM-1 interfaces for interconnection with third-party equipment. l The SL1Q and SL1O boards do not support MSP but support SNCP. The SL1Q and SL1O boards are mainly connected to the low-level transmission equipment, such as the OptiX Metro 500 and the OptiX Metro 100. 3.2.4 Single-Fiber STM-1 Interface Board SB2D/SB2L/SB2R The SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards access single-fiber STM-1 optical signals. Functions l Accesses STM-1 optical signals. l Provides two types of optical interfaces: S-1.1 and L-1.1. l Provides the single-fiber transceiver optical interface to receive and transmit optical signals at the same time by carrying the signals on two different wavelengths on one fiber. l Supports ALS. l Detects and reports the alarms and performance events on the line. l Supports inloop and outloop. l Supports linear MSP and unidirectional MSP. Table 3-10 lists the functions of the SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 3-10 Functions of the SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards Item SB2D SB2L SB2R Number of interfaces 2xSTM-1 1xSTM-1 1xSTM-1 Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 Type of connector SC SC SC Transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) wavelengths Left optical interface: 1550 nm (Tx)/1310 nm (Rx) Right optical interface: 1310 nm (Tx)/1550 nm (Rx) Only the left optical interface is available: 1550 nm (Tx)/1310 nm (Rx) Only the right optical interface is available: 1310 nm (Tx)/1550 nm (Rx)
Application The SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards are applied to the network in the same way as the OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q, and SL1O boards. In the application, pay attention to the following points: l In the case of the SB2D board, the transmit wavelength and receive wavelength of the left optical interface are 1550 nm and 1310 nm respectively, and the transmit wavelength and receive wavelength of the right interface are 1310 nm and 1550 nm respectively. l In the case of the SB2L board, only the left optical interface is available. The transmit wavelength and receive wavelength are 1550 nm and 1310 nm respectively. l In the case of the SB2R board, only the right optical interface is available. The transmit wavelength and receive wavelength are 1310 nm and 1550 nm respectively. l When you use the single-fiber interface boards in networking, make sure that the wavelength of the receive interface and the wavelength of the transmit interface are matched. For example, a transmit interface operating at a wavelength of 1550 nm corresponds to a receive interface operating at a wavelength of 1550 nm, and a transmit interface operating at a wavelength of 1310 nm corresponds to a receive interface with a wavelength of 1310 nm. l When you use the SB2R and SB2L boards in networking, make sure that the SB2R and SB2L boards are used at adjacent sites, as shown in Figure 3-4. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-15 Figure 3-4 Application of the SB2R and SB2L boards SB2L SB2R SB2R SB2R SB2L SB2L SB2R SB2L
3.2.5 STM-1 Electrical Interface Board SDE/SLE The SDE and SLE boards access STM-1 electrical signals. Functions l Accesses STM-1 electrical signals. l Detects and reports the alarms and performance events on the line. l Supports inloop and outloop on the line. l Provides the synchronous clock source for the clock unit. Table 3-11 lists the functions of the SDE and SLE boards. Table 3-11 Functions of the SDE and SLE boards Comparison SLE SDE Number of interfaces 1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1 Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 Type of connector SMB SMB Number of synchronous clock sources 1 2
Application When the OptiX 155/622H uses the SDE board or the SLE board, the equipment can implement the following functions: 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) l Receives and transmits STM-1 electrical signals when the OptiX 155/622H is connected to other Huawei equipment, such as the OptiX 155/622 and the OptiX 2500+. l Interconnects with other equipment that provides STM-1 electrical interfaces, such as the microwave equipment, ATM electrical interface equipment, and other equipment with STM-1 electrical interfaces. 3.3 PDH Unit The OptiX 155/622H provides the following types of PDH interface boards: E1 electrical interface board, E1/T1 electrical interface board, and E3/T3 electrical interface board. The PDH interface board receives and transmits PDH service signals, and provides synchronous clock sources for the clock unit. The OptiX 155/622H provides the following PDH electrical interface boards. 3.3.1 E1 Electrical Interface Boards SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T The SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D, and PD2T boards access E1 services. 3.3.2 E1/T1 Compliant Electrical Interface Board SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T The SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, and PM2T boards access E1/T1 services. 3.3.3 E3/T3 Electrical Interface Board PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T The PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T boards access E3/T3 services. 3.3.1 E1 Electrical Interface Boards SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/ PD2T The SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D, and PD2T boards access E1 services. Functions l Accesses E1 services. l Supports asynchronous mapping of E1 signals to VC-12s, as defined in ITU-T G.703. l Provides the 75-ohm unbalanced and 120-ohm balanced interfaces, whose characteristics comply with related specifications defined in ITU-T G.703. l Processes VC-12 path overheads, configures each service channel, monitors alarms and performance of each service channel, and communicates with the SCC unit. l Supports inloop and outloop to test the quality of E1 signals or to locate the fault, thus facilitating the maintenance. l Provides the synchronous clock source for the clock unit. l The SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T boards support the settings of 75/120-ohm impedance at the tributary port. Table 3-12 lists the functions of the SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D, and PD2T boards. Table 3-12 Functions of the SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D and PD2T boards Item SP1S SP1D SP2D PD2S PD2D PD2T Number of interfaces 4xE1 8xE1 16xE1 16xE1 32xE1 48xE1 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-17 Item SP1S SP1D SP2D PD2S PD2D PD2T Type of connector 2 mm HM connector Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU6 a IU4 IU4 IU4 Number of synchronou s clock sources 1 2 2 2 4 6 a: The IU6 is a logical slot that is integrated on the SCB board.
Application The SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T board supports the following application: l Connected to the E1 trunk cable of a switch for application in the local telephone network. l Connected to the optical line terminal (OLT) and optical network unit (ONU) in the access network. In this way, the OptiX 155/622H can be applied in the access network. l Interconnected with the communication equipment that provides standard E1 interfaces, such as mobile base stations, wireless access base stations, node machines in the digital data network (DDN), and routers of the Internet service provider (ISP) and LAN. 3.3.2 E1/T1 Compliant Electrical Interface Board SM1S/SM1D/ PM2S/PM2D/PM2T The SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, and PM2T boards access E1/T1 services. Functions l Accesses E1/T1 services. l Supports asynchronous mapping of E1/T1 signals to VC-12s as defined in ITU-T G.703 and multiplexing of TU-12s into TUG-2s. l Provides the 100-ohm balanced interface for T1 signals and the 75-ohm unbalanced and 120-ohm balanced interfaces for E1 signals, whose characteristics comply with related specifications defined in ITU-T G.703. l Selects E1/T1 signals through software. l Processes the VC-12 path overheads, configures each service channel, monitors alarms and performance of each service channel, and communicates with the SCC unit. l Supports inloop and outloop to test the quality of E1/T1 services or to locate the fault, thus facilitating the maintenance. l Provides the synchronous clock source for the clock unit. Table 3-13 lists the functions of the SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, and PM2T boards. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 3-13 Functions of the SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, and PM2T boards Item SM1S SM1D PM2S PM2D PM2T Number of interfaces 4xE1/T1 8xE1/T1 16xE1/T1 32xE1/T1 48xE1/T1 Type of connector 2 mm HM connector Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU4 IU4 IU4 Number of synchronous clock sources 1 2 2 4 6
Application The SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T board supports the following application: l Connected to the OLT and ONU in the access network. In this way, the OptiX 155/622H can be applied in the access network. l Interconnected with the communication equipment that provides standard E1 or T1 interfaces, such as mobile base stations, wireless access base stations, node machines in the DDN, and routers of the ISP and LAN. 3.3.3 E3/T3 Electrical Interface Board PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/ PT3T The PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T boards access E3/T3 services. Functions l Accesses E3/T3 service signals. l Supports asynchronous mapping of E3/T3 signals to VC-3s as defined in ITU-T G.703 and multiplexing of TU-3s into TUG-3s. l Provides the 75-ohm unbalanced E3 interface and 100-ohm/120-ohm balanced T3 interface that comply with ITU-T G.703. l Encodes/Decodes E3/T3 signals to implement the transmitting/receiving of high performance E3 or T3 signals. l Maps E3/T3 PDH signals into VC-4s and demaps E3/T3 PDH signals from VC-4s. l Provides the synchronous clock source for the clock unit. Table 3-14 lists the functions of the PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T boards. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-19 Table 3-14 Functions of the PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T boards Item PE3S PE3D PE3T PT3S PT3D PT3T Number of interfaces 1xE3 2xE3 3xE3 1xT3 2xT3 3xT3 Type of connector SMB Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 Interface impedance 75 ohms 75 ohms 75 ohms 100/120 ohms 100/120 ohms 100/120 ohms Number of synchronou s clock sources 1 2 2 1 2 2
Application The PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T board is interconnected with the communication equipment that provides standard E3 or T3 interfaces. 3.4 Data Unit The OptiX 155/622H provides various Ethernet interface boards to receive and transmit FE and GE service signals. According to the encapsulation protocol and mapping granularity, the Ethernet interface boards are classified into the following types. 3.4.1 Ethernet Interface Boards ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 (Supporting the ML-PPP Protocol) The ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards support the multi-link point to point protocol (ML- PPP) only. The mapping granularity is VC-12. These boards transmit Ethernet services. 3.4.2 Ethernet Transparent Transmission Boards EFT/ELT2/EGT Boards (Supporting the GFP Protocol) The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards support the generic framing procedure (GFP). The mapping granularities are VC-12 and VC-3. These boards transmit Ethernet services. 3.4.3 Ethernet Switching Boards EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS (Supporting the GFP Protocol) The EFS, EFS4, EGS, and EFSC boards support the Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) encapsulation protocol. The mapping granularities are VC-12 and VC-3. These boards are mainly used to transmit Ethernet services. 3.4.4 ATM Interface Board AIUD/AIUQ The AIUD and AIUQ boards transmit ATM services and provide protection for ATM services. 3.4.5 Nx64kbit/s Interface Board N64/N64Q/FP2D The N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards convert Nx64 kbit/s signals and Framed E1 signals into E1 signals. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 3.4.6 Single Pair High-Bit-Rate Digital Subscriber Line Interface Board SHLQ The SHLQ board transmits E1 signals and Nx64 kbit/s signals over a long distance. 3.4.7 Tone and Data Access Board TDA The TDA board receives and transmits audio signals and environment monitoring signals. 3.4.1 Ethernet Interface Boards ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 (Supporting the ML-PPP Protocol) The ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards support the multi-link point to point protocol (ML- PPP) only. The mapping granularity is VC-12. These boards transmit Ethernet services. Functions l Provides 10M/100M Ethernet electrical interfaces and 100M optical interfaces, whose electrical characteristics, such as the flow control function, comply with IEEE 802.3x. l Supports the working modes of auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex/half-duplex and 10M full-duplex/half-duplex. l Supports the ML-PPP encapsulation protocol with the encapsulation granularity of VC-12. l Provides bandwidth sharing and statistical multiplexing based on virtual local area network (VLAN) and port to improve the bandwidth utilization. l Supports Ethernet layer 2 switching. l Supports isolation among different users, and VLAN isolation within one user. l The ET1 and ET1D boards support Ethernet private line (EPL) services. The ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards support Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services. l Supports multicast and broadcast. l Supports the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) to prevent broadcast storms. Table 3-15 lists the functions of the ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards. Table 3-15 Functions of the ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards Board Feature ET1 ET1O ET1D EF1 Number of FE electrical interfaces 8 8 2 4 Number of FE optical interfaces - - - 2 Type of connector RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Electrical interface: RJ-45 Optical interface: LC Valid slot IU4 IU4 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU4 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-21 Board Feature ET1 ET1O ET1D EF1 Working mode Electrica l interface Auto- negotiation, 10M/100M full-duplex, 10M/100M half-duplex Auto- negotiation, 10M/100M full-duplex, 10M/100M half-duplex Auto- negotiation, 10M/100M full-duplex, 10M/100M half-duplex Auto- negotiation, 10M/100M full-duplex, 10M/100M half-duplex Optical interface - - - 100M full- duplex Encapsulation protocol ML-PPP VC-4 bandwidth on the SDH side 1 1 1 1 Bound bandwidth 48xE1 48xE1 16xE1 48xE1 Number of VCTRUNKs 16 16 16 16 Layer 2 switching - Supported Supported Supported VLAN Supported Supported Supported Supported EVPL Supported - Supported - EPL Supported - Supported - EPLAN - Supported Supported Supported EVPLAN - - - - Spanning tree - Supported Supported Supported RMON Supported Supported Supported Supported IGMP Snooping - Supported Supported Supported
Application The ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards are interconnected with PCs, routers or Ethernet switches to transmit Ethernet services. Pay attention to the following points: l The ET1 and ET1D boards support transparent transmission of services and are applicable to EPL services. l The ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards support layer 2 switching of services and are applicable to EPLAN services. l The EF1 board provides 100M optical interfaces and can be interconnected with the data equipment that provides 100M optical interfaces. l The ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards use the same encapsulation protocol and mapping granularity. Hence, they can be interconnected with each other. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 3.4.2 Ethernet Transparent Transmission Boards EFT/ELT2/EGT Boards (Supporting the GFP Protocol) The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards support the generic framing procedure (GFP). The mapping granularities are VC-12 and VC-3. These boards transmit Ethernet services. Functions l Provides 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet interfaces, the electrical characteristics of which comply with IEEE 802.3x. l Maps Ethernet services into VC-12s or VC-3s. l The EGT, EFT, and ELT2 boards support the GFP, link access procedure-SDH (LAPS), and high level data link control (HDLC). l Receives and transmits test frames. l Supports inloop and outloop for fast fault locating and troubleshooting. l Counts test frames, reports the result, and generates alarms upon errors. Table 3-16 lists the functions of the EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards. Table 3-16 Functions of the EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards Board Feature EFT ELT2 EGT Number of FE electrical interfaces 4 - - Number of FE optical interfaces - 2 - Number of GE optical interfaces - - 1 Type of connector RJ-45 LC LC Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 Working mode FE electrical interface Auto- negotiation, 10M/100M full- duplex - - FE optical interface - 100M full- duplex - GE optical interface - - Auto-negotiation, 1000M full- duplex VC-4 bandwidth on the SDH side 2 2 2 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-23 Board Feature EFT ELT2 EGT Bound bandwidth 6xVC-3 or 63xVC-12 + 3xVC-3 6xVC-3 or 63xVC-12 + 3xVC-3 6xVC-3 or 63xVC-12 Number of VCTRUNKs 4 2 1 Layer 2 switching - - - VLAN - - - EVPL - - - EPL Supported Supported Supported EPLAN - - - EVPLAN - - - Spanning tree - - - GFP Supported Supported Supported LAPS Supported Supported Supported HDLC Supported Supported Supported Link state pass through (LPT) Supported Supported Supported Test frame Supported Supported Supported CAR - - - CoS - - - Intra-board link aggregation group (LAG) - - - Port mirroring - - - IGMP snooping - - - LCAS V2 Supported Supported Supported Ethernet OAM - - - RMON Supported Supported Supported QinQ - - -
Application The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards can be interconnected with PCs, routers, or Ethernet switches to transmit Ethernet services. Pay attention to the following points: l The EGT board provides 1000M optical interfaces and can be interconnected with the data equipment that provides 1000M optical interfaces. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) l The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards only support the transparent transmission of services and are applicable to EPL services. l The ELT2 board provides 100M optical interfaces and can be interconnected with the data equipment that provides 100M optical interfaces. l The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards use the same encapsulation protocol and mapping granularity, and they can be interconnected with each other. l The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards support the LCAS V2. 3.4.3 Ethernet Switching Boards EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS (Supporting the GFP Protocol) The EFS, EFS4, EGS, and EFSC boards support the Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) encapsulation protocol. The mapping granularities are VC-12 and VC-3. These boards are mainly used to transmit Ethernet services. Functions l Provides 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet interfaces, whose electrical characteristics comply with IEEE 802.3x. l Maps Ethernet services into VC-12s or VC-3s. l The EFS, EGS, and EFSC boards support the GFP encapsulation protocol. The EFS4 board supports the GFP, Link Access Procedure-SDH (LAPS), and High Level Data Link Control (HDLC) encapsulation protocols. l Receives and transmits test frames. l Supports inloop and outloop for fast fault location and troubleshooting. l Counts test frames, reports the result, and generates alarms. l The EFS, EFS4, EFSC, and EGS boards support the OAM function. l The EFS, EFSC, EGS, and EFS4 boards support the auto-sensing of the network cable. l The EFS4 board supports the high precise time synchronization technology, which complies with IEEE 1588 V2. Table 3-17 lists the functions of the EFS, EFS4, EGS, and EFSC boards. Table 3-17 Functions of the EFS, EFS4, EGS, and EFSC boards Board Feature EFS EFSC EGS EFS4 Number of FE electrical interfaces 4 12 - 4 Number of FE optical interfaces - - - - Number of GE optical interfaces - - 1 - Connector RJ-45 RJ-45 LC RJ-45 Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU4 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-25 Board Feature EFS EFSC EGS EFS4 Wor king mod e FE electrical interface Auto- negotiation, 10M/100M full-duplex, 10M/100M half-duplex Auto- negotiatio n, 10M/ 100M full- duplex, 10M/ 100M half- duplex - Auto- negotiatio n, 100M full-duplex FE optical interface - - - - GE optical interface - - 1000M full- duplex - VC-4 bandwidth on the SDH side 4 4 4 4 Bound bandwidth 12xVC-3 or 126xVC-12 +6xVC-3 12xVC-3 or 126xVC-1 2+6xVC-3 12xVC-3 or 126xVC- 12 +6xVC-3 12xVC-3 or 63xVC-12 +9xVC-3 Number of VCTRUNKs 24 24 24 8 Layer 2 switching Supported Supported Supporte d Supported VLAN Supported Supported Supporte d Supported EVPL Supported Supported Supporte d Supported EPL Supported Supported Supporte d Supported EPLAN Supported Supported Supporte d Supported EVPLAN Supported Supported Supporte d Supported STP Supported Supported Supporte d Supported GFP Supported Supported Supporte d Supported LAPS - - - Supported 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Board Feature EFS EFSC EGS EFS4 HDLC - - - Supported Link state pass through (LPT) Supported Supported Supporte d Supported Test frame Supported Supported Supporte d Supported CAR Supported Supported Supporte d Supported CoS Supported Supported Supporte d Supported Intra-board link aggregation group (LAG) - - - Supported Port mirroring - - - Supported IGMP Snooping Supported Supported Supporte d Supported LCAS V2 protocol Supported Supported Supporte d Supported Ethernet OAM Supported Supported Supporte d Supported RMON Supported Supported Supporte d Supported QinQ - - - Supported
Application The EFS, EFS4, EGS, EFSC boards interconnect with PCs, routers, or Ethernet switches to transmit Ethernet services. Note the following points: l The EFS, EFS4, EGS, EFSC boards support Layer 2 switching and multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) to carry EPL, Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), EPLAN, and Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) services. l The EGS board provides 1000M optical interfaces to interconnect with data equipment that has 1000M optical interfaces. l The EFS, EFS4, EGS, EFSC boards use the same encapsulation protocol and mapping granularity, and thus they can interconnect with each other. l The EFS, EFS4, EFSC, and EGS boards support the LCAS V2 protocol. 3.4.4 ATM Interface Board AIUD/AIUQ The AIUD and AIUQ boards transmit ATM services and provide protection for ATM services. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-27 Functions The AIUD board supports two external ports and two internal ports. The AIUQ board supports four external ports and four internal ports. The AIUD and AIUQ boards can be installed in slot IU4 of the OptiX 155/622H. l Supports the configuration of multicast and point-to-point ATM services (including spatial multicast services and logical multicast services). l Provides VP/VC connection-based 1+1/1:1 protection for ATM services. Eight protection configuration modes are available. l Supports flow control for ATM services. Fifteen flow control modes are supported according to ITU-T Recommendations. l Supports the ATM OAM function and continuity check (CC) by sending the loopback (LB) cell and CC cell, and captures the alarm indication signal (AIS) and the remote defect indication (RDI) signal. l Supports the setting of the ATM port attributes. The ATM ports can be set according to the service requirements. Setting and querying the VP/VC sub-space are supported. l Monitors ATM service alarms. All the alarms related to ATM features can be reported. l Supports the performance measurement of ATM services. All the performance events related to ATM features can be counted. l Supports the SDH features of ATM services. Application The AIUD and AIUQ boards mainly transmit and protect ATM services. The AIUD and AIUQ boards support the following services: l Constant bit rate (CBR) services l Real time variable bit rate (rt-VBR) services l Non-real time variable bit rate (nrt-VBR) services l Unspecified bit rate (UBR) services The AIUD and AIUQ boards do not support available bit rate (VBR) services. The CBR services are applied to voice services, video services, and circuit emulation services at a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and latency. The rt-VBR services are applied to audio and video services at a variable bit rate. The nrt-VBR services are applied to data transmission. The UBR services are applied to LAN emulation and file transfer. The services and traffic types supported by the OptiX 155/622H comply with IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1. For details, see Table 3-18. Table 3-18 ATM service types and traffic types No. Traffic Type Service Type Parameter 1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR - 2 atmNoClpNoScr UBR.1 Clp01Pcr CBR Clp01Pcr 3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) No. Traffic Type Service Type Parameter 4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr 5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs 6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs 7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs 8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt 9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt 10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt 11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt 12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt 13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt 14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
3.4.5 Nx64kbit/s Interface Board N64/N64Q/FP2D The N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards convert Nx64 kbit/s signals and Framed E1 signals into E1 signals. Functions Table 3-19 Functions of the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards Board Feature N64 N64Q FP2D Processi ng capabilit y Performs timeslot cross- connection for two NM or two monitoring signals (at Nx64 kbit/s), and E1 services (2xE1 signals from the interface side or 8xE1 signals from the line side), thus realizing re- integration of E1 services and timeslot extraction Converts 4xNx64 kbit/s service signals into E1 signals and performs timeslot cross-connection, thus realizing re- integration of E1 services and timeslot extraction Accesses 16xFramed E1 signals and provides time division cross-connect services at the 64 kbit/s level OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-29 Board Feature N64 N64Q FP2D Interfac e specific ation Nx64 kbit/s interface: V.35/V.24/X.21/ RS-449/EIA-530 Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4 Nx64 kbit/s interface: V.35/X.21/RS-449/ V.24/RS-530/ RS-530A Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4 Type of connect or 2 mm HM 2 mm HM DB78 Protecti on Not supported Not supported Supports the PPS protection. Loopbac k Supports inloop and outloop for all ports Supports inloop and outloop for all ports Supports inloop and outloop for all ports Alarm and perform ance event Provides abundant alarms and performance events, which facilitates management and maintenance of the equipment Provides abundant alarms and performance events, which facilitates management and maintenance of the equipment Provides abundant alarms and performance events, which facilitates management and maintenance of the equipment
Application The N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards are mainly applied to point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint transmission of the video conference systems and routers, and are used for convergence in the case of multi-point router access, and thus access V.35/V.24/X.21/ RS-449/EIA-530 multi-protocol interface services and Framed E1 services to transmission networks. The FP2D board is applicable to DDN private networks of small and medium-sized enterprises, government departments, banks or security business halls. 3.4.6 Single Pair High-Bit-Rate Digital Subscriber Line Interface Board SHLQ The SHLQ board transmits E1 signals and Nx64 kbit/s signals over a long distance. Functions l Provides four G.SHDSL electrical interfaces to transmit E1/V.35 services over a long distance on the existing twisted pair network by adopting the single pair high-bit-rate digital subscriber line (SHDSL) technology. l The characteristics of interfaces comply with the corresponding specifications defined in ITU-T G.991.2. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) l Transmits Framed E1 and Nx64 kbit/s data services in the G.SHDSL format, and can thus access remote E1 and Nx64 kbit/s signals. l Processes the path overheads, configures each G.SHDSL service channel, and monitors the alarms and performance of each G.SHDSL service channel. In addition, this board implements the communication between the G.SHDSL service channels and the SCC unit. l Supports inloop and outloop so that faults can be located quickly. l Uses the RJ-11 connector. l Provides one synchronous clock source for the clock unit. Application l This board accesses G.SHDSL services to the transmission equipment. l This board extends the transmission distance of E1 signals to more than 3 km, or the transmission distance of 3x64 kbit/s signals to more than 6.5 km. 3.4.7 Tone and Data Access Board TDA The TDA board receives and transmits audio signals and environment monitoring signals. Functions l Provides 12 audio interfaces and four standard RS-232/RS-422 interfaces. l The audio interface is 600-ohm balanced, which can be set to the feed-providing mode or non feed-providing mode for the user equipment. l The RS-232/RS-422 data port transmits services at a maximum rate of 19.2 kbit/s. l Processes the VC-12 path overheads, configures the E1 service bearer channel, monitors the alarms and performance of the E1 service bearer channel (excluding the audio and data services), and communicates with the SCC unit. l Supports inloop and outloop to test services and locate faults. l Provides the cross-connection at the 64 kbit/s level. Application The application of the TDA board is described as follows: l The audio interface supports the point-to-point bidirectional service, which is called the private line service. This type of service is mainly applied to point-to-point application scenarios, such as banks and post bank cards. Usually, services are transmitted by a TDA board that is connected to a private line modem. l The audio interface also supports the point-to-multipoint unidirectional service. This type of service is applied to the transmission of paging information. l The RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces transmit environmental information, power monitoring information, and NM information. In addition, they can form a simple network with PCs. Table 3-20 lists the transmission distances of the audio interface and the data interface. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-31 Table 3-20 Transmission distances of the audio interface and data interface on the TDA board Interface Type Maximum Transmission Distance Audio interface 4000 m RS-232 asynchronous interface 15 m RS-422 asynchronous interface 1000 m
3.5 Cross-Connect and System Control Board SCB The SCB board integrates the functions of the line, tributary, cross-connect, clock, time, SCC, and orderwire modules. Functions The SCB board of the OptiX 155/622H integrates the functions of the line, tributary, cross- connect, clock, time, SCC, and orderwire modules. The functions of each module are as follows. Line Module l Provides two STM-1 or STM-4 or STM-16 optical interfaces. The STM-1 optical interface is named OI2D, the STM-4 optical interface OI4D and the STM-16 optical interface OI16D. l The STM-1 optical interface supports the S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 interface types and uses the SC/LC connector. l The STM-4 optical interface supports the S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 interface types and uses the SC/LC connector. l The STM-16 optical interface supports the S-16.1 interface type and uses the LC connector. l Provides two synchronous clock sources for the clock unit. l Supports automatic laser shutdown (ALS). Tributary Module l Accesses 16 E1 signals. l Supports the asynchronous mapping of E1 signals to VC-12s as defined in ITU-T G.703. l Provides the 75-ohm unbalanced and 120-ohm balanced interfaces, whose characteristics comply with the requirements specified in ITU-T G.703. l Processes the VC-12 path overheads, configures each service channel, monitors the alarms and performance of each service channel, and communicates with the SCC unit. l Supports inloop and outloop to test the quality of E1 services or locate the fault, thus facilitating the maintenance. l Provides the synchronous clock source for the clock unit. Cross-Connect Module l Supports cross-connections at the VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 level, and thus grooms services from line to line, from line to tributary, and from tributary to tributary. l The supported higher order cross-connect capacity is 21.25 Gbit/s and the lower order cross- connect capacity is 5 Gbit/s. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Clock and Time Module l Provides two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s external interfaces, whose impedance is 120 ohms. l Supports three clock working modes: trace, holdover and free-run. l Supports the multiplexing with the SYNC external clock interface and the COM2 and COM3 transparent data ports for outputting the time information. SCC Module l Exchanges information with other boards to configure equipment data and collect performance and alarm data. l Provides a standard Ethernet NM interface and RS-232 data terminal equipment (DTE) interface to realize the equipment management by the U2000. l Supports the switching between the independent mode and the cooperative mode. Realizes the hitless switching of services between the TDM domain and the packet domain. Orderwire Module l Provides one orderwire interface for conference call and broadcast. l Provides four RS-232 (RJ-45 type) serial data ports for point-to-multipoint equipment connection and transparent transmission of data. l Provides four input and two output housekeeping interfaces. The input housekeeping interfaces monitor the status of the external equipment, and the output housekeeping interfaces output alarm indications and control the external equipment. Application As the core of the OptiX 155/622H, the SCB board grooms services, extracts clock signals, implements inter-board communication, and provides the orderwire function. As the line and tributary modules are integrated on the SCB board, the number of slots is reduced on the equipment. 3.6 Integrated Mixed-Service Processing Board CXP(Packet Mode) The CXP board mainly provides the packet data transmission function, and can access the FE and GE services when working with the SCB board. Functions l Accesses, processes, and forwards the FE and GE services. Aggregates and separates FE and GE signals. l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and reception and transmission of the packet that complies with IEEE 1588 V2. l Supports the inband DCN on the Ethernet. Table 3-21 shows the functional features of the CXP board. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-33 Table 3-21 Functional features of the CXP board Functional Feature Description Number of FE electrical interfaces 4 Number of FE optical interfaces 2 Number of GE optical interfaces 4 Connector RJ-45 LC Interface type 100BASE-TX 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX/LX/ VX/ZX Optical module Supports the hot swappable SFP optical module. Supports a transmission distance of 500 m, 10 km, 40 km, or 80 km through the optical interfaces. Supports the colored optical interface. Working mode FE electrical interfaces Auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex FE optical interface 100M full-duplex GE optical interface Auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex Interface characteristics l Supports the settings of the MTU at the Ethernet port. l Supports the settings of loop mode, query of port status, query of optical interface type, and others. Loopback function l Supports PHY inloop at the Ethernet port. l Supports MAC outloop at the Ethernet port. Format of service frame Provides the Layer 2 forwarding function. Supports the frame encapsulation formats that comply with IEEE 802.1q. Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes. Ethernet service type l Supports the point-to-point E-line service. l Supports the multipoint-to-point E-Aggr service. QoS Provides powerful QoS capabilities, including the simple flow classification and complex flow classification of the VLAN packet and MPLS packet, and the bandwidth limit function. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Functional Feature Description Link aggregation group (LAG) Supports up to 16 LAGs. Each LAG supports up to eight LAG members. Protection scheme l Supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection. l Supports the MPLS PW 1+1/1:1 protection. l Supports the LAG protection. Clock function l Supports the synchronous Ethernet clock. l Supports the IEEE 1888 V2-compliant time synchronization. Maintenance features l Supports detection of port faults by providing alarms and performance events to facilitate management and maintenance of the equipment. These alarms and performance events are related to the Ethernet interface connection failure, installation of an improper optical module, and shut-down of laser. l Supports the hot swapping of optical module and query of optical module. l Supports the RMOM counting function. l Supports the warm reset and cold reset. MPLS OAM Supports the MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. ETH-OAM Supports the ETH-OAM that complies with IEEE 802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah. VLAN tags Each port supports 4K VLAN tags. Number of traffic classes supported by the system 1024 ETH OAM instances supported by the system 256 Number of E-line services 1024 Number of E-Aggr services 4 E1 CES 16 Number of MPLS tunnels 512 unidirectional MPLS tunnels Value range of the label: 16 to 32K Number of static PWs 512 Value range of the label: 16 to 32K OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-35 Functional Feature Description PW OAM Supports the PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. Number of QinQ links 1024 Number of MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection groups and number of MPLS PW 1+1/1:1 protection groups The maximum sum of the number of MPLS tunnel protection groups and the number of MPLS PW protection groups is 128. WARNING MPLS labels refer to tunnel labels and PW labels. On the OptiX 155/622H, the value of a tunnel label must be different from the value of a PW label. This is because the tunnel and PW have the same value range (16 to 32K) and they cannot use the same label at the same time. On the OptiX 155/622H, the length of an MPLS label is 2K. Thus, the value of the label must be a consecutive value string ranging from 16 to 32K.
Application l The CXP board supports the configuration of the E-Line and E-Aggr services. l The CXP board provides the FE and GE optical interfaces to interconnect with the 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s optical interfaces. 3.7 Environment Monitoring Unit EMU The EMU board monitors the environment. Functions The environment monitoring unit EMU provides the following environment monitoring functions: l Monitors the voltage of two channels of -48 V power supply. l Monitors the working temperature of the equipment. l Provides 12 housekeeping inputs and six housekeeping outputs. l Provides 1-channel RS-232/RS-422 serial communication. Application l This board detects and monitors the voltage of two channels of power supply at the same time, and reports the result to the U2000. l This board monitors the working temperature of the OptiX 155/622H, and reports the result to the U2000. l This board inputs external alarms and outputs equipment alarms through the housekeeping interface. l The serial interface can be set to RS-232 or RS-422 to transparently transmit serial communication information of other equipment, such as the monitoring information. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 3.8 Power Converter System UPM The uninterruptible power module (UPM) is a 220 V AC to -48 V DC power converter system that is used only by the OptiX 155/622H. The UPM consists of the double-channel hot backup AC/DC converter module, monitoring module, and storage battery. Figure 3-5 shows the composition of the UPM. Figure 3-5 Composition of the UPM RS232 - 48 V DC Power box Rectifier module AC input Communication interface Storage battery
3.8.1 Functions The UPM functions as a backup of the equipment power supply. When the mains supply is interrupted, the UPM automatically enables the storage batteries to supply power, thus ensuring the uninterrupted power supply. 3.8.2 UPM Power Converter Box The UPM power converter box can convert power supplies. 3.8.3 Storage Battery The storage battery can be installed in the storage battery box or on the storage battery tray. When the mains supply is interrupted, the UPM automatically enables the storage battery to supply power, thus ensuring uninterrupted power supply. 3.8.1 Functions The UPM functions as a backup of the equipment power supply. When the mains supply is interrupted, the UPM automatically enables the storage batteries to supply power, thus ensuring the uninterrupted power supply. l The UPM provides two AC/DC rectifier modules with the hot backup design for power conversion. If one rectifier module fails, the other rectifier module takes over the load immediately so that the ongoing services are not affected. This feature significantly improves the stability of the system. Each rectifier module can support a load of 250 W. When only one rectifier module works, it can ensure that two sets of OptiX 155/622H in full configuration function normally or that four sets of OptiX 155/622H in standard configuration function normally. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-37 l The UPM provides the monitoring module, which combines the functions of power monitoring and NMS monitoring. The monitoring module monitors and controls the parameters and status of the rectifier module, AC/DC power distribution, and storage battery group in real time, and then reports the parameters and status to the U2000. The storage batteries support the automatic management and the protection function. The monitoring module automatically measures the charging and discharging currents of the storage batteries, and controls the rectifier module to perform even charging, floating charging and current limitation on the storage batteries. l The UPM provides protection for the storage batteries. When the mains supply is interrupted, the UPM automatically enables the storage batteries to supply power. The storage batteries can provide a normal power supply of five to six hours for the OptiX 155/622H in standard configuration. 3.8.2 UPM Power Converter Box The UPM power converter box can convert power supplies. The dimensions of the UPM power converter box are 436 mm (W) x 240 mm (D) x 44 mm (H). Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7 show the appearance of the power converter box. Figure 3-6 Appearance of the power converter box
Figure 3-7 Rear view of the power converter box AC100~240 ALM Vout ALM Vout ALM RUN RS-232 Rectifier module Communication interface Storage battery interface Load Load AC input
3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 3.8.3 Storage Battery The storage battery can be installed in the storage battery box or on the storage battery tray. When the mains supply is interrupted, the UPM automatically enables the storage battery to supply power, thus ensuring uninterrupted power supply. Storage Battery Box The dimensions of the storage battery box are 436 mm (W) x 315 mm (D) x 133 mm (H). Figure 3-8 shows the appearance of the storage battery box. Figure 3-8 Storage battery box
Storage Battery Tray The storage battery tray can house the storage batteries of two types: 12 Ah and 20 Ah. The dimensions of the storage battery tray are 436 mm (W) x 173.5 mm (D) x 125 mm (H). Figure 3-9 shows the appearance of the storage battery tray. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-39 Figure 3-9 Storage battery tray
3.9 Software Architecture 3.9.1 Overview The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and works with other modules. 3.9.2 Communication Protocols Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and Q.812. 3.9.3 Board Software The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board. 3.9.4 NE Software The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board running on the NE. In addition, the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the U2000 and the boards so that the U2000 can control and manage the NE. 3.9.5 Network Management System The NM system implements unified management over the optical transmission network, and maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network. 3.9.1 Overview The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and works with other modules. The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE software and NM system. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) The software resides respectively on functional boards, the SCC, and NM computer. Hierarchical structure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer performs specific functions and provides service for the upper layer. Figure 3-10 shows the system software architecture. In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System" and "Board Software". Figure 3-10 Software architecture High Level Communication Module Communication Module Equipment Management Module Real-time multi-task operating system NE software Network Management System Board Software Database Management Module Network side Module
3.9.2 Communication Protocols Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and Q.812. Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and NE (NE) equipment through local communication network (LCN). At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS) are provided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface. According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is developed on the basis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1) protocol stack. In addition, to support remote access of the NM through modem, IP layer uses serial line internet protocol (SLIP). 3.9.3 Board Software The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-41 It receives the commands issued from the NE software and reports the board status to the NE software through performance events and alarms. The specific functions include: l Alarm management l Performance management l Configuration management l Communication management It directly controls the functional circuits in corresponding boards and implements ITU-T compliant specific functions of the NE. 3.9.4 NE Software The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board running on the NE. In addition, the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the U2000 and the boards so that the U2000 can control and manage the NE. According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at the unit management layer in the telecommunication management network, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediation function (MF) and the OS function at the network unit layer. Data communication function (DCF) provides the communication channel between NE and other equipment (including the mediation device, the U2000 and other NEs). l Real-Time Multi-Task Operating System The NE software offers a real-time multi-task operating system to manage public resources and support application programs. It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an application program execution environment, which is independent of the processor hardware. l Communication and Control Module The communication and control module is the interface module between NE software and board software. According to related communication protocols, the communication and control module implements the communication between NE software and board software for information exchange and equipment maintenance. The communication and control module issues the board maintenance and operation commands sent from the NE software to the boards. The communication and control module also reports the status, alarm and performance events of the boards to the NE software. l Network Side (NS) Module The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer. Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules: Qx interface module Command line interface (CLI) module Security management module l Equipment Management Module 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for implementing NE management. It includes administrator and agent. The administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events. The agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator, implement the operations on the managed object, and send performance events according to the status change of the managed object. l High-Level Communication Module The high-level communication module implements the Message Communication Function (MCF) in the functional block of the transmission network equipment. It provides hardware interfaces through the control board, transports the Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provision (OAM&P) information, and exchanges management information between the U2000 and the NEs and between the NEs. It consists of the network communication module, serial communication module and ECC communication module. l Database Management Module The database management module is an important part of the NE software. It includes two independent parts: data and program. The data is organized in the form of database, including the network database, alarm database, performance database and equipment database. The program manages and accesses the data in the database. 3.9.5 Network Management System The NM system implements unified management over the optical transmission network, and maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates standard management information model as well as object-oriented management technology. It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitor and manage the network equipment. The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipment and the transmission network to help operate, maintain and manage the transmission equipment. The management functions of the NM software include: l Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears, and counts alarms in real time; implements alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis and fault diagnosis. l Performance management: configures performance monitoring; browses, analyzes and prints performance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; resets performance register. l Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails, subnets and time. l Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management, NE login management, NE login locking, NE setting locking and local craft terminal (LCT) access control of the equipment. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Product Architecture Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-43 l Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser shutdown (ALS) and optical fiber power detection; collects equipment data to help the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting. 3 Product Architecture OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 3-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 4 Data Features About This Chapter The data features include Ethernet features, ATM features, and DDN features. 4.1 Ethernet Features This topic describes the functions, application, and protection of the Ethernet features of the OptiX 155/622H. 4.2 ATM Features This topic describes the functions, application, and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX 155/622H. 4.3 DDN Features This topic describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX 155/622H. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Data Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-1 4.1 Ethernet Features This topic describes the functions, application, and protection of the Ethernet features of the OptiX 155/622H. 4.1.1 Functions The OptiX 155/622H provides various types of Ethernet boards to meet the requirements of different Ethernet services. 4.1.2 Application The OptiX 155/622H provides the Ethernet service access function that is integrated on the SDH transmission platform. Hence, the OptiX 155/622H can transmit voice services and data services at the same time. 4.1.3 Protection The OptiX 155/622H provides hierarchical protection for Ethernet services. 4.1.1 Functions The OptiX 155/622H provides various types of Ethernet boards to meet the requirements of different Ethernet services. Table 4-1 lists the Ethernet boards that support the ML-PPP encapsulation protocol. Table 4-2 lists the Ethernet boards that support the GFP encapsulation protocol. Table 4-1 Functions of the ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards Board Feature ET1 ET1O ET1D EF1 Number of FE electrical interfaces 8 8 2 4 Number of FE optical interfaces - - - 2 Type of connector RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Electrical interface: RJ-45 Optical interface: LC Valid slot IU4 IU4 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU4 Working mode Electrical interface Auto- negotiation, 10M/100M full-duplex, 10M/100M half-duplex Auto- negotiation, 10M/100M full-duplex, 10M/100M half-duplex Auto- negotiation, 10M/100/ full- duplex, 10M/ 100M half- duplex Auto- negotiation, 10M/100M full-duplex, 10M/100M half-duplex Optical interface - - - 100M full- duplex 4 Data Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Board Feature ET1 ET1O ET1D EF1 Encapsulation protocol ML-PPP Uplink bandwidth on the SDH side 1xVC-4 1xVC-4 1xVC-4 1xVC-4 Bound bandwidth 48xVC-12 48xVC-12 16xVC-12 48xVC-12 Number of VCTRUNKs 16 16 16 16 Layer 2 switching - Supported Supported Supported VLAN Supported Supported Supported Supported EPL Supported - Supported - EVPL - - - - EPLAN - Supported Supported Supported EVPLAN - - - - Spanning tree - Supported Supported Supported IGMP Snooping - Supported Supported Supported RMON Supported Supported Supported Supported
Table 4-2 Functions of the EFS, EFS4, EFT, EGS, EFSC, ELT2, and EGT boards Function EFS EFSC EGS EFT ELT2 EGT EFS4 Number of FE electrical interfaces 4 12 - 4 - - 4 Number of FE optical interfaces - - - - 2 - - Number of GE optical interfaces - - 1 - - 1 - Type of connector RJ-45 RJ-45 LC RJ-45 LC LC RJ-45 Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU4 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Data Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-3 Function EFS EFSC EGS EFT ELT2 EGT EFS4 W ork ing mo de FE electri cal interfa ces Auto- negotiation , 10M/ 100M full- duplex, 10M/ 100M half- duplex Auto- negotiat ion, 10M/ 10M full- duplex, 10M/ 100M half- duplex - Auto- negoti ation, 10M/ 100M full- duplex - - Auto- negotiati on, 100M full- duplex FE optical interfa ces - - - - 100M full- duplex - - GE optical interfa ces - - 100M full- duplex - - Auto- negotiat ion, 1000M full- duplex - Uplink bandwidth on the SDH side 4xVC-4 4xVC-4 4xVC- 4 2xVC- 4 2xVC-4 2xVC-4 4xVC-4 Bound bandwidth 12xVC-3 or 126xVC-1 2 + 6xVC-3 12xVC- 3 or 126xV C-12 + 6xVC-3 12xVC -3 or 126xV C12 + 6 xVC-3 6xVC- 3 or 63xVC 12 + 3xVC- 3 6xVC-3 or 63xVC 12 + 3xVC-3 6xVC-3 or 63xVC- 12 12xVC-3 or 63xVC-1 2 + 9xVC-3 Number of VCTRUNKs 24 24 24 4 2 1 8 Layer 2 switching Supported Support ed Suppor ted - - - Supporte d VLAN Supported Support ed Suppor ted - - - Supporte d EVPL Supported Support ed Suppor ted - - - Supporte d EPL Supported Support ed Suppor ted Suppor ted Support ed Support ed Supporte d EPLAN Supported Support ed Suppor ted - - - Supporte d 4 Data Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Function EFS EFSC EGS EFT ELT2 EGT EFS4 EVPLAN Supported Support ed Suppor ted - - - Supporte d Spanning tree Supported Support ed Suppor ted - - - Supporte d GFP Supported Support ed Suppor ted Suppor ted Support ed Support ed Supporte d LAPS - - - Suppor ted Support ed Support ed Supporte d HDLC - - - Suppor ted Support ed Support ed Supporte d LPT Supported Support ed Suppor ted Suppor ted Support ed Support ed Supporte d Test frame Supported Support ed Suppor ted Suppor ted Support ed Support ed Supporte d CAR Supported Support ed Suppor ted - - - Supporte d CoS Supported Support ed Suppor ted - - - Supporte d Traffic management - - - - - - Supporte d Queue management - - - - - - Supporte d IGMP Snooping Supported Support ed Suppor ted - - - Supporte d LCAS V2 Supported Support ed Suppor ted Suppor ted Support ed Support ed Supporte d Ethernet OAM Supported Support ed Suppor ted - - - Supporte d RMON Supported Support ed Suppor ted Suppor ted Support ed Support ed Supporte d QinQ - - - - - - Supporte d Port mirroring - - - - - - Supporte d Intra-board LAG - - - - - - Supporte d
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Data Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-5 4.1.2 Application The OptiX 155/622H provides the Ethernet service access function that is integrated on the SDH transmission platform. Hence, the OptiX 155/622H can transmit voice services and data services at the same time. The OptiX 155/622H supports the following types of Ethernet services: l EPL service l EVPL service l EPLAN service l EVPLAN service EPL Service The EPL realizes the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 4-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination nodes thorough their respective VCTRUNKs. This ensures secure and reliable data transmission. In addition, the Ethernet services are protected by the SDH self-healing network. Figure 4-1 PORT-based EPL service VCTRUNK 1 PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 POTR1 A NE 1 NE 2 B B A PORT2 OptiX 155/622H Enterprise user
EVPL Service The OptiX 155/622H supports the following two types of EVPL service: PORT-shared EVPL: The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share the bandwidth. As shown in Figure 4-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to VLAN ID, to distinguish services from different departments of company A. The two services are transmitted over their respective VCTRUNKs. 4 Data Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Figure 4-2 PORT-shared EVPL service Headquarters of company A NE 1 NE 2 Department 1 of company A Department 2 of company A OptiX 155/622H Enterprise user PORT1 PORT2 VLAN100 PORT1 VLAN100 VLAN200 VLAN200 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK-shared EVPL: The OptiX 155/622H can converge and distribute the EVPL service in the following two modes. l The VLAN ID-based mode, as shown in Figure 4-3. l The QinQ-based mode, as shown in Figure 4-4. Figure 4-3 VLAN ID-based EVPL service VCTRUNK A A' NE 1 NE 2 B Community User Cyber cafe user OptiX 155/622H VLAN100 VLAN200 VLAN100 VLAN200 PORT2 PORT1 PORT 1 PORT2 B'
Figure 4-4 QinQ-based EVPL service Branch 1 NE 1 NE 2 Company A C-Aware VCTRUNK1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT1 PORT2 S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware OptiX 155/622H Department B Add label Strip label Department A Department A Department B Branch 2
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Data Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-7 EPLAN Service Through the EPLAN service, NEs can dynamically share the bandwidth. The OptiX 155/622H uses the virtual bridge (VB) or pure bridge to implement the layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service. Each NE in the system can created one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control (MAC) address table. This table is updated periodically by self-learning. The accessed data is transmitted according to the destination MAC address. See Figure 4-5. Figure 4-5 EPLAN service NE 1 NE 2 OptiX 155/622H NE3 Department 3 of company A Access point Port 1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VB VB VCTRUNK1 VB PORT1 VCTRUNK1 PORT1 PORT1 Department 2 of company A Department 1 of company A Port 1 Port 1 Company A
EVPLAN Service Through the EVPLAN service, NEs can dynamically share the bandwidth and the service isolation between data of the same VLAN can be implementd. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service an meet the service requirement. As shown in Figure 4-6, the Ethernet board of the OptiX 155/622H uses the VB+VLAN filter table to implement the EVPLAN service. 4 Data Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Figure 4-6 EVPLAN service NE 1 NE 2 Company A OptiX 155/622H NE3 Access point Port2 LSP Port1 VCTRUNK1 PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK2 Department 1 of company A VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 Company B LSP LSP PORT1 PORT2 V C T R U N K 1 P O R T 1 P O R T 2 V C T R U N K 2 UNI VB1 VB1 VB1 UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI Port1 Port2 Port1 Port2 Department 1 of company B Department 2 of company A Department 3 of company B Department 3 of company A Department 2 of company B
4.1.3 Protection The OptiX 155/622H provides hierarchical protection for Ethernet services. l At the Ethernet service layer, the OptiX 155/622H supports the following protection schemes: Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)/Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Link state pass through (LPT) Link aggregation group (LAG) Port protection switching (PPS) l At the optical transmission layer, the OptiX 155/622H supports the multiplex section protection (MSP) and sub-network connection protection (SNCP) schemes. LCAS LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the virtual concatenation. LCAS provide the following functions: l When applied to the virtual concatenation technology, LCAS can be used for configuring the system capacity, increasing or decreasing the number of concatenated VCs, and dynamically changing the bearer bandwidth. l LCAS protects and restores failed members. As shown in Figure 4-7, LCAS can dynamically add or delete members according to the requirements, and can thus dynamically increase or decrease the bandwidth. Services are not interrupted during the bandwidth adjustment. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Data Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-9 Figure 4-7 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment by using LCAS The bandwidth of 10M is need. Member Headquarters Branch MSTP network OptiX 155/622H Headquarters Member Member Member New member Branch
As shown in Figure 4-8, LCAS protects the Ethernet services. When certain members fail, they are automatically deleted, whereas other members transmit data normally. This ensures that the concatenation group is available. When the failed members are available again, they are automatically restored and data is loaded to these members again. Figure 4-8 Protection for the virtual concatenation group through LCAS Failed member Delete the failed member Headquarters Branch Branch OptiX 155/622H MSTP-network Member Member Member Member Headquarters
For more details on LCAS, see LCAS in the Feature Description of this product. 4 Data Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) STP/RSTP The Ethernet board supports STP and RSTP. When STP or RSTP is enabled, the network topology is modified logically to prevent a broadcast storm. STP or RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. For more details on STP and RSTP, see STP and RSTP in the Feature Description of this product. LPT LPT is a link-based protection scheme. In a network, when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT function is used to shut down the local port so that the peer router is informed of the abnormality of the working link. Hence, services are switched from the active port to the standby port and the services are protected. The LPT function has two modes, point-to-point (P2P) and point-to-multipoint (P2MP). For more details on LPT, see LPT in the Feature Description of this product. LAG LAG means that multiple links connecting to the same device are bound to increase the bandwidth and enhance the link reliability. The aggregated links can be regarded as one link. The features of LAG are as follows: l Improving the link availability In an LAG, the LAG members back up each other dynamically. When a link is interrupted, another LAG member can take over its work immediately. l Increasing the link bandwidth LAG provides an economical method for you to improve the link transmission rate. By binding multiple physical links, you can obtain a data link with higher bandwidth without upgrading the existing equipment. The total bandwidth of the link after aggregation is the sum of the bandwidth of the physical links. Load sharing: The physical links of the same group can share the data traffic and back up each other. Higher reliability: The members of the same group back up each other dynamically. For more information on the LAG, see LAG in the Feature Description of this product. MSP and SNCP MSP enables the signal between and including two multiplex section terminations (MSTs) to switch from the working section over to the protection section. The principle of SNCP is "dual transmission and selective reception". The service receiver selects the better service from the two service sources sent by the service sender. The Ethernet services support MSP and SNCP at the optical transmission layer. 4.2 ATM Features This topic describes the functions, application, and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX 155/622H. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Data Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-11 4.2.1 Functions The OptiX 155/622H provides two types of ATM processing boards: AIUD and AIUQ. 4.2.2 Application The OptiX 155/622H supports the application of several types of ATM services. 4.2.3 Protection The ATM services of the OptiX 155/622H are protected at several layers. 4.2.1 Functions The OptiX 155/622H provides two types of ATM processing boards: AIUD and AIUQ. The AIUD board can access and process two STM-1 ATM services and the AIUQ board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. Table 4-3 lists the functions of the AIUD and AIUQ boards. Table 4-3 Functions of the AIUD and AIUQ boards Item AIUD AIUQ Interface on the front panel 2xSTM-1 4xSTM-1 Optical interface type Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2 Type of connector LC Optical module type SFP Mapping mode VC-4 Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514 and ATM forum TM 4.0 ATM multicast connection Spatial multicast and logical multicast ATM protection (ITU-T I.630) Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, and VC-Ring OAM function (ITU- T I.610) AIS, RDI, loopback (LB), and Continuity check (CC)
4.2.2 Application The OptiX 155/622H supports the application of several types of ATM services. 4 Data Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Supported Service Types and Traffic Types l The CBR service applies to the voice service, and the video service and circuit emulation service of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and latency. l The rt-VBR service applies to the audio and video service of a variable rate. l The nrt-VBR service is mainly used for data transmission. l The UBR service is generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer. The service types and traffic types supported by the OptiX 155/622H meet the requirements specified in IETF RFC 2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNT 3.1. For more details, see Table 4-4. Table 4-4 ATM service types and traffic types No. Traffic Type Service Type Parameter 1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR - 2 atmNoClpNoScr UBR.1 Clp01Pcr CBR Clp01Pcr 3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr 4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr 5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs 6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs 7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs 8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt 9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt 10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt 11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt 12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt 13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt 14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
Application of Bandwidth-Exclusive ATM Services When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processing boards at the ATM layer of only the source NE and sink NE. On intermediate NEs, only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed for these ATM services, without ATM layer processing. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Data Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-13 In this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output. As shown in Figure 4-9, the 155 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE2 exclusively occupy a VC-4 bandwidth each. Only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the two services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical port. Figure 4-9 Application of bandwidth-exclusive ATM services NE 2 NE 4 NE 1 NE 3 155M ATMTraffic 155M ATM Traffic 622M ATM Traffic Service Convergence DSLAM Router DSLAM STM-4 SDH Ring
Application of Bandwidth-Shared ATM Services The VP-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC4 path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs. As shown in Figure 4-10, NE1 accesses 155Mbit/s ATM services from the ATM board and sends these services to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then, after these services are encapsulated into VC-4, they are sent to the line by the cross-connect board. NE2 accesses 155Mbit/s ATM services from the optical port, and then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM services from NE1 are dropped at NE2 for the processing at ATM layer. Then, the locally accessed services and the services from the upstream NE are encapsulated into the same VC-4 and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring or VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s. 4 Data Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Figure 4-10 VP/VC-Ring VC4 VP/VC-Ring NE 2 NE 4 NE 1 NE 3 155M ATM Traffic 155M ATM Traffic 622M ATM Traffic The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to the NE2,and then send to VC/VP-Ring after coverged with local service DSLAM DSLAM Router DSLAM 155M ATM Traffic
4.2.3 Protection The ATM services of the OptiX 155/622H are protected at several layers. The available protection schemes are as follows: l Protection schemes at the ATM layer l Protection schemes at the optical transmission layer, such as MSP and SNCP Protection Schemes at the ATM Layer Compliant with ITU-T I.630, protection schemes at the ATM layer are classified in different ways. For more details, see Table 4-5. You can select a combination of the following types according to the requirement, for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection. Table 4-5 Classification of ATM protection schemes Item Protection Type Classification Scheme 1+1 protection 1:1 protection Switching direction Unidirectional protection Bidirectional protection Connection level VPC protection VCC protection Protection domain Trail protection Sub-Network Connection Protection (SNCP) OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Data Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-15 Item Protection Type Revertive mode Revertive Non-revertive Protected Object Single connection protection Group connection protection
Protection Schemes at the Optical Transmission Layer The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical transmission layer, where MSP and SNCP are available. You can set the hold-off time of for the ATM protection switching. When the network impairment occurs, the MSP or SNCP switching at the optical transmission layer can be triggered first. This realizes the protection for the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not triggered.) 4.3 DDN Features This topic describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX 155/622H. 4.3.1 Functions The OptiX 155/622H uses the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards to access and process DDN services. 4.3.2 Application When the DDN board is configured in the OptiX 155/622H, the SDH network can access and groom DDN services. 4.3.3 Protection The OptiX 155/622H provides the MSP and SNCP protection schemes on the SDH side. 4.3.1 Functions The OptiX 155/622H uses the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards to access and process DDN services. l The N64 board provides two V.35/V.21/RS-449/EIA-530 interfaces and two Framed E1 interfaces. l The N64Q board provides four V.35/X.24/RS-449/V.24/RS-530/RS-530A interfaces. l The FP2D board accesses 16 Framed E1 signals and provides time division cross-connect services at the 64 kbit/s level. Table 4-6 lists the functions of the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards. 4 Data Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 4-6 Functions of the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards Board Feature N64 N64Q FP2D Processin g capability Performs timeslot cross- connection for two NM or two monitoring signals (at Nx64 kbit/s), and E1 services (two E1 signals from the interface side or eight E1 signals from the line side), thus realizing re-integration of E1 services and timeslot extraction. Converts four Nx64 kbit/s service signals into E1 signals and performs timeslot cross- connection, thus realizing re-integration of E1 services and timeslot extraction. Accesses 16 Framed E1 signals and provides time division cross- connect services at the 64 kbit/s level. Interface specificat ion Nx64 kbit/s interface: V. 35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/ EIA-530 Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4 Nx64 kbit/s interface: V.35/X.21/RS-449/V. 24/RS-530/RS-530A Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4 Type of connector 2 mm HM 2 mm HM DB78 Protectio n Not supported Not supported Not supported Loopbac k Supports inloop and outloop for all ports. Supports inloop and outloop for all ports. Supports inloop and outloop for all ports. Alarm and performa nce event Provides abundant alarms and performance events, which facilitate management and maintenance for the equipment. Provides abundant alarms and performance events, which facilitates management and maintenance for the equipment. Provides abundant alarms and performance events, which facilitates management and maintenance for the equipment.
4.3.2 Application When the DDN board is configured in the OptiX 155/622H, the SDH network can access and groom DDN services. The N64 and N64Q boards mainly apply to point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint- to-multipoint transmission of the video conference system and routers, and convergence in the case of multi-point routers access, thus realizing the accessing of the V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/ EIA-530 multi-protocol interface services and Framed E1 services into transmission networks. The FP2D board is applicable to the DDN private networks of small and medium-sized enterprises, government departments, banks, or security business halls. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Data Features Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-17 4.3.3 Protection The OptiX 155/622H provides the MSP and SNCP protection schemes on the SDH side. 4 Data Features OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 4-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 5 Packet Feature About This Chapter The OptiX 155/622H supports installation of a board with the packet feature. With such a board, the TDM domain can be overlapped with the packet domain to transmit data on the two domains. Thus, the smooth evolution from the TDM network to the packet network is realized. 5.1 MPLS The OptiX 155/622H uses the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology to transmit the Ethernet service on the packet mode. This topic describes the concept of the MPLS and its application scenario on the equipment. 5.2 Functions The OptiX 155/622H provides the CXP board with the packet switching function to meet the requirement of the packet feature. 5.3 Application On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports the Ethernet service and E1 CES service. 5.4 Protection On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports several protection schemes, such as MPLS tunnel/PW 1+1/1:1 and LAG. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Packet Feature Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-1 5.1 MPLS The OptiX 155/622H uses the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology to transmit the Ethernet service on the packet mode. This topic describes the concept of the MPLS and its application scenario on the equipment. 5.1.1 Background The MPLS was originally presented to increase the forwarding speed of a router. Currently, the MPLS is providing solutions for the backbone routing and virtual private network (VPN). 5.1.2 Basic Concepts To learn about the MPLS technology, you need to learn about its concepts first, including the forwarding equivalence class (FEC), label, label distribution protocol (LDP), and label switched path (LSP). 5.1.3 System Structure The MPLS uses the forwarding plane to manage the packet service. 5.1.4 Capability of Supporting the MPLS Technology By using the MPLS technology, the OptiX 1555/622H not only greatly increases the packet forwarding speed but also provides the capability of seamlessly connecting to Layer 2 networks such as Ethernet. In addition, the OptiX 1555/622H provides better solutions for application of the TE, VPN, and QoS. 5.1.1 Background The MPLS was originally presented to increase the forwarding speed of a router. Currently, the MPLS is providing solutions for the backbone routing and virtual private network (VPN). The MPLS is integrated with the Layer 3 routing function of the IP network and the highly effective forwarding mechanism of the traditional Layer 2 network. Similar to the forwarding scheme of the existing Layer 2 network, the forwarding plane is connection-oriented. Hence, the MPLS can realize seamless connection between IP and Layer 2 networks such as the ATM network and Ethernet. In addition, the MPLS provides better solutions for the application of the traffic engineering (TE), VPN, and quality of service (QoS). Hence, the MPLS becomes a criterion for expanding the data network and increasing the network operability. To better meet the requirements of the transport network for service quality, the connectionless feature of the standard MPLS should be simplified, and the OAM and protection capabilities should be enhanced. The OptiX 155/622H supports a series of MPLS features that are applicable to the transport network. 5.1.2 Basic Concepts To learn about the MPLS technology, you need to learn about its concepts first, including the forwarding equivalence class (FEC), label, label distribution protocol (LDP), and label switched path (LSP). FEC As a classification forwarding technology, the MPLS considers the packets of the same forwarding scheme as a class, which is called an FEC. On the MPLS network, the packets in the FEC are processed in the same manner. 5 Packet Feature OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Label A label is a short identifier of fixed length and is valid locally (only in the MPLS domain). The label is used to identify the FEC that one packet belongs to. In certain cases, for example, when load sharing is required, several labels may correspond to one FEC, but one label indicates one FEC only. The packet headers carry labels and the labels do not contain any topology information. Labels are valid locally. A label has four bytes, which are encapsulated in the manner shown in Figure 5-1. Figure 5-1 Encapsulation structure of the label Label 19 22 23 TTL 31 S Exp 0 A label has the following four fields. l Label: 20 bits. This field indicates the label value and is used as a forwarding pointer. l Exp: 3 bits. This field is reserved for tests and currently used for class of service (CoS). l S: 1 bit. This field is an identifier at the bottom of a stack. The MPLS supports the layered labels, or multiple labels. If S is 1, it indicates that the label is at the bottom. l TTL: 8 bits. This field has the same indication as the time to live (TTL) of IP packets. Similar to the VPI/VCI for ATM, the label is a connection identifier. In the case of realizing the MPLS over Ethernet, the label is encapsulated between the Ethernet frame header and the IP layer. Figure 5-2 shows the encapsulation location of the label in a packet. Figure 5-2 Encapsulation location of the labels in a packet Ethernet/PPP header Label Layer 3 data Ethernet/SDH packet LDP The LDP is the control protocol for the MPLS. Similar to the signaling protocol of the traditional network, the LDP is responsible for creation and maintenance of LSP and PW, FEC classification, and label distribution. The MPLS can use the following types of LDPs: l Protocols that are exclusively stipulated for label distribution, such as LDP and constraint- routing label distribution protocol (CR-LDP) l Existing protocols that can be extended to support label distribution, such as border gateway protocol (BGP) LSP On the MPLS network, the path that an FEC travels through is called an LSP. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Packet Feature Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-3 An LSP is a unidirectional path from the ingress to the egress. Each node on an LSP is a label switched router (LSR). According to the data transport direction, adjacent LSRs are respectively called upstream LSR and downstream LSR. LSPs are classified into two types: static LSP and dynamic LSP. The static LSP is manually configured by the administrator, whereas the dynamic LSP is created dynamically by the LDP. The OptiX 155/622H supports the static LSP only. 5.1.3 System Structure The MPLS uses the forwarding plane to manage the packet service. The forwarding plane is also called the data plane, which is connection-oriented and uses Layer 2 networks such as Ethernet. The MPLS uses short labels of fixed length to encapsulate packets. The forwarding plane then fast forwards the encapsulated packets. 5.1.4 Capability of Supporting the MPLS Technology By using the MPLS technology, the OptiX 1555/622H not only greatly increases the packet forwarding speed but also provides the capability of seamlessly connecting to Layer 2 networks such as Ethernet. In addition, the OptiX 1555/622H provides better solutions for application of the TE, VPN, and QoS. On the OptiX 1555/622H, the supported MPLS technical features are as listed in Table 5-1 and the supported performance indexes are as listed in Table 5-2. Table 5-1 MPLS technical features supported by the OptiX 1555/622H Feature Description Basic MPLS functions Supports the basic functions and service forwarding. Realizes the multi-service access network by using the LSP tunnel technology. Supports the static tunnel. MPLS OAM Supports MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. Supports the ping command and traceroute command for the MPLS tunnel. Supports the LSP availability test by using the MPLS echo request and MPLS echo reply. MPLS protection Supports the MPLS tunnel/PW 1+1/1:1 protection. Others Supports the TE based on the MPLS tunnel. Supports the QoS.
5 Packet Feature OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 5-2 MPLS performance indexes supported by the OptiX 1555/622H Feature Description Number of MPLS tunnels 512 Number of PWs 512
5.2 Functions The OptiX 155/622H provides the CXP board with the packet switching function to meet the requirement of the packet feature. Table 5-3 shows the principal functional features of the CXP board when this board works with the SCB board. Table 5-3 Functional features of the CXP board Functional Feature Description Number of FE electrical interfaces 4 Number of FE optical interfaces 2 Number of GE optical interfaces 4 Connector RJ-45 LC Interface type 100BASE-TX 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX/LX/ VX/ZX Optical module Supports the hot swappable SFP optical module. Supports a transmission distance of 500 m, 10 km, 40 km, or 80 km through the optical interfaces. Supports the colored optical interface. Working mode FE electrical interfaces Auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex FE optical interface 100M full-duplex GE optical interface Auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex Interface characteristics l Supports the settings of the MTU at the Ethernet port. l Supports the settings of loop mode, query of port status, query of optical interface type, and others. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Packet Feature Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-5 Functional Feature Description Loopback function l Supports PHY inloop at the Ethernet port. l Supports MAC outloop at the Ethernet port. Format of service frame Provides the Layer 2 forwarding function. Supports the frame encapsulation formats that comply with IEEE 802.1q. Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes. Ethernet service type l Supports the point-to-point E-line service. l Supports the multipoint-to-point E-Aggr service. QoS Provides powerful QoS capabilities, including the simple flow classification and complex flow classification of the VLAN packet and MPLS packet, and the bandwidth limit function. Link aggregation group (LAG) Supports up to 16 LAGs. Each LAG supports up to eight LAG members. Protection scheme l Supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection. l Supports the MPLS PW 1+1/1:1 protection. l Supports the LAG protection. Clock function l Supports the synchronous Ethernet clock. l Supports the IEEE 1888 V2-compliant time synchronization. Maintenance features l Supports detection of port faults by providing alarms and performance events to facilitate management and maintenance of the equipment. These alarms and performance events are related to the Ethernet interface connection failure, installation of an improper optical module, and shut-down of laser. l Supports the hot swapping of optical module and query of optical module. l Supports the RMOM counting function. l Supports the warm reset and cold reset. MPLS OAM Supports the MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. ETH-OAM Supports the ETH-OAM that complies with IEEE 802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah. 5 Packet Feature OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Functional Feature Description VLAN tags Each port supports 4K VLAN tags. Number of traffic classes supported by the system 1024 ETH OAM instances supported by the system 256 Number of E-line services 1024 Number of E-Aggr services 4 E1 CES 16 Number of MPLS tunnels 512 unidirectional MPLS tunnels Value range of the label: 16 to 32K Number of static PWs 512 Value range of the label: 16 to 32K PW OAM Supports the PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. Number of QinQ links 1024 Number of MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection groups and number of MPLS PW 1+1/1:1 protection groups The maximum sum of the number of MPLS tunnel protection groups and the number of MPLS PW protection groups is 128. WARNING MPLS labels refer to tunnel labels and PW labels. On the OptiX 155/622H, the value of a tunnel label must be different from the value of a PW label. This is because the tunnel and PW have the same value range (16 to 32K) and they cannot use the same label at the same time. On the OptiX 155/622H, the length of an MPLS label is 2K. Thus, the value of the label must be a consecutive value string ranging from 16 to 32K.
5.3 Application On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports the Ethernet service and E1 CES service. 5.3.1 Ethernet Service On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H can transmit the data service in two Ethernet service forms (that is, E-Line and E-Aggr), which are specified by the Mobile Entertainment Forum (MEF) standardization organization. 5.3.2 CES Service On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports the UNI-NNI E1 CES service and UNI-UNI E1 CES service. 5.3.1 Ethernet Service On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H can transmit the data service in two Ethernet service forms (that is, E-Line and E-Aggr), which are specified by the Mobile Entertainment Forum (MEF) standardization organization. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Packet Feature Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-7 E-Line Service The OptiX 155/622H supports the point-to-point Ethernet service, that is, E-Line service. Figure 5-3 shows an example of how the OptiX 155/622H supports the E-Line service. Company A has branches in City 1 and City 3; Company B has branches in City 2 and City 3; Company C has branches in City 1 and City 2. The branches of Company A, Company B, and Company C have requirements for data communication. The OptiX 155/622H can provide E- Line services for Company A, Company B, and Company C to meet their communication requirements. In addition, the service data between them can be separated from each other. Figure 5-3 Example of E-Line service Nationwide/Global carrier Ethernet Metro carrier Ethernet Metro carrier Ethernet Metro carrier Ethernet Company A City 3 City 1 Company A E-Line1 E-Line2 E-Line3 Company C Company B Company C Company B City 2
E-Aggr Service The OptiX 155/622H supports the multipoint-to-point Ethernet service, that is, E-Aggr service. As shown in Figure 5-4, one carrier needs to construct a 3G network. On this network, services of each NodeB are aggregated and transported to the RNC. In this case, the equipment considers the data between the NodeBs and the RNC as one service. The total bandwidth and the other parameters such as QoS need to be set on the OptiX 155/622H aggregation node. 5 Packet Feature OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Figure 5-4 Example of E-Aggr service GE FE FE FE RNC Node B Node B Node B
5.3.2 CES Service On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports the UNI-NNI E1 CES service and UNI-UNI E1 CES service. As shown in Figure 5-5, the OptiX 155/622H supports the UNI-NNI E1 CES service and UNI- UNI E1 CES service. The OptiX 155/622H accesses the TDM services through the TDM interfaces, and CES PWs can be created between the OptiX 155/622H NEs to emulate the end- to-end TDM service. For customers, the emulated TDM service is similar to the real TDM service. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Packet Feature Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-9 Figure 5-5 Example of E1 CES service UNI-NNI UNI-UNI BTS BSC BTS BTS TDM E1 link PW Tunnel OptiX 155/622H Base station Base station controller
5.4 Protection On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports several protection schemes, such as MPLS tunnel/PW 1+1/1:1 and LAG. For details on the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection, see 6.2.5 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection Schemes. For details on the MPLS PW 1+1/1:1 protection, see 6.2.6 PW APS Protection. For details on the Ethernet LAG protection, see 6.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (Packet Mode). 5 Packet Feature OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 6 Protection About This Chapter This topic describes the comprehensive protection mechanism of the OptiX 155/622H in terms of equipment-level protection, network-level protection, and clock protection. 6.1 Equipment-Level Protection The equipment-level protection supported by the OptiX 155/622H includes the 1+1 hot backup for the power supply, board-level protection against abnormalities, 1+1 protection for the Ethernet board on the TDM mode and packet mode. 6.2 Network-Level Protection The network-level protection includes SDH service protection, Ethernet service protection, and ATM service protection. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Protection Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-1 6.1 Equipment-Level Protection The equipment-level protection supported by the OptiX 155/622H includes the 1+1 hot backup for the power supply, board-level protection against abnormalities, 1+1 protection for the Ethernet board on the TDM mode and packet mode. 6.1.1 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Input Unit The POI/POU board of the OptiX 155/622H inputs two channels of -48 V/-60 V DC power supply at the same time. These two channels of power supply share the load in normal cases. If one of them fails, the other power supply takes over the load to ensure that the equipment is operating normally. 6.1.2 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include power failure protection during software loading, overvoltage and undervoltage protection for the power supply, and software upgrading protection. 6.1.3 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (TDM Mode) On the TDM mode, the Ethernet board supports the LAG protection, which can realize intra- board link aggregation only. 6.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (Packet Mode) On the packet mode, the Ethernet board supports the LAG protection, which can realize intra- board link aggregation and inter-board link aggregation. 6.1.1 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Input Unit The POI/POU board of the OptiX 155/622H inputs two channels of -48 V/-60 V DC power supply at the same time. These two channels of power supply share the load in normal cases. If one of them fails, the other power supply takes over the load to ensure that the equipment is operating normally. 6.1.2 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include power failure protection during software loading, overvoltage and undervoltage protection for the power supply, and software upgrading protection. Power Failure Protection During Software Loading The verification function is provided for applications and data. If the software loading is interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot the application or data that is not successfully loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading until the software is successfully loaded. Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection for the Power Supply The power board provides the lightning protection component to effectively protect the board from being damaged by transient high voltages (such as lightning). When the voltage is too low, the central processing unit (CPU) of the board is automatically reset and then the software can re-initialize the chip. 6 Protection OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Software Upgrading Protection As two sets of NE software are stored in the SCB board, the software of a new version can be loaded without affecting the currently running software. The software of a new version replaces the previous version after it is confirmed to be correct. This replacement does not affect the configuration information that is already set or the existing services on the NE. The software of a previous version can continue to function if software upgrading fails. 6.1.3 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (TDM Mode) On the TDM mode, the Ethernet board supports the LAG protection, which can realize intra- board link aggregation only. The EFS4 board supports the intra-board LAG protection. Table 6-1 lists the parameters of the LAG protection on the TDM mode. Table 6-1 LAG protection parameters of the Ethernet board Parameter Description Switching conditions (Any of the conditions triggers the switching.) l The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG or manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in two directions. Switching time 500 ms. l The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG or manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in one direction. In addition, the ports of the interconnected equipment are set to the auto-negotiation mode. Switching time 500 ms. l The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in two directions. Switching time 3.5 s. Restoration mode l Revertive (by default) l Non-revertive LAG Type l Static l Manual Load sharing mode l Load sharing l Load non-sharing
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Protection Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-3 6.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (Packet Mode) On the packet mode, the Ethernet board supports the LAG protection, which can realize intra- board link aggregation and inter-board link aggregation. The CXP board supports the LAG protection. Table 6-2 lists the parameters of the LAG protection on the packet mode. Table 6-2 LAG protection parameters of the Ethernet board Parameter Description Switching conditions (Any of the conditions triggers the switching.) l The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG or manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in two directions. Switching time 500 ms. l The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG or manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in one direction. In addition, the ports of the interconnected equipment are set to the auto-negotiation mode. Switching time 500 ms. l The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in two directions. Switching time 3.5 s. Restoration mode l Revertive (by default) l Non-revertive LAG Type l Static l Manual Load sharing mode l Load sharing l Load non-sharing
6.2 Network-Level Protection The network-level protection includes SDH service protection, Ethernet service protection, and ATM service protection. 6.2.1 SDH Service Protection The OptiX 155/622H supports the linear MSP, ring MSP, SNCP, inter-ring service protection, and fiber-shared virtual trail protection for SDH services. 6.2.2 Ethernet Service Protection 6 Protection OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) The OptiX 155/622H provides hierarchical protection for data services. It supports various protection schemes at the Ethernet service layer and the SDH layer. 6.2.3 ATM Service Protection The OptiX 155/622H supports the VP/VC connection-based 1+1/1:1 protection. When this protection scheme is used, eight configuration modes are available. 6.2.4 LPT Protection LPT can detect the faults that occur at the service access node or on the intermediate transmission network, and then can instruct the equipment at both ends of the transmission network to start the backup network immediately for communication. In this manner, LPT ensures the normal transmission of important data. 6.2.5 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection Schemes On the packet mode, the OptiX 1555/622H supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes. In the case of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes, the protection channel protects the services that are carried by the working channel. When the working channel becomes faulty, the services are switched to the protection channel. In the case of the 1+1 protection, services are dually fed and selectively received. In the case of the 1:1 protection, services are singly fed and received. 6.2.6 PW APS Protection PW APS is a type of network-level protection scheme. To be specific, when the working PW fails, the protection PW protects services in the failed working PW. PW APS is available in two types: PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1. 6.2.1 SDH Service Protection The OptiX 155/622H supports the linear MSP, ring MSP, SNCP, inter-ring service protection, and fiber-shared virtual trail protection for SDH services. Linear MSP The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX 155/622H supports the 1+1 and 1:N (N5) protection schemes. If the 1:N protection scheme is used, extra services can be transmitted on the protection system. The switching time of the linear MSP is less than 50 ms, which complies with ITU-T G.841. MSP Ring The OptiX 155/622H supports the two-fiber MS shared protection ring, which complies with ITU-T G.841. The switching time is less than 50 ms. SNCP The OptiX 155/622H supports SNCP, which complies with ITU-T G.841. The OptiX 155/622H can still ensure a switching time that is less than 50 ms even when the switching of multiple services occurs. Inter-Ring Service Protection The OptiX 155/622H provides protection for services between rings that use different protection schemes (for example, between an SNCP ring and an MSP ring). This protection scheme complies with ITU-T G.842. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Protection Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection Figure 6-1 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection STM-4 S T M - 4 STM-1 SNCP STM-1 SNCP
As shown in Figure 6-1, when the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-4 is logically divided into several lower order or higher order paths. These paths are connected to other links to form rings at the path layer. In addition, protection schemes, such as SNCP, can be configured accordingly for these rings at the path layer. 6.2.2 Ethernet Service Protection The OptiX 155/622H provides hierarchical protection for data services. It supports various protection schemes at the Ethernet service layer and the SDH layer. 6.2.3 ATM Service Protection The OptiX 155/622H supports the VP/VC connection-based 1+1/1:1 protection. When this protection scheme is used, eight configuration modes are available. 6.2.4 LPT Protection LPT can detect the faults that occur at the service access node or on the intermediate transmission network, and then can instruct the equipment at both ends of the transmission network to start the backup network immediately for communication. In this manner, LPT ensures the normal transmission of important data. On the TDM mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports the LPT function. In actual engineering application, data of users is accessed to the service network through the access equipment so that the users can exchange their data. Based on the networking mode, LPT can be classified into point-to-point LPT and point-to- multipoint LPT. For details on the LPT feature, see LPT in the Feature Description. 6 Protection OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Point-to-Point LPT Figure 6-2 shows the engineering application of point-to-point LPT. When access link 1 becomes faulty, LPT helps to notify the opposite equipment RS-B of the fault information. In this process, the link state is passed through. After disconnecting the link between NE2 and RS- B, RS-B starts the backup network and sets up a new connection with RS-A. Figure 6-2 Point-to-point LPT NE1 NE2 RS-A Backup network Access link 1 Service network RS-B Access link 2
Point-to-Multipoint LPT Figure 6-3 shows the engineering application of point-to-multipoint LPT. On the user side, when the link between RS-A and NE1 becomes faulty, LPT helps to notify the opposite equipment (NE2, NE3, and NE4) of the fault information. In this process, the link state is passed through. After disconnecting the links between NE2, NE3, NE4, and RS-B, RS-B starts the backup network and sets up a new connection with RS-A. On the network side, two modes are available for NE1: strict mode and non-strict mode. When LPT is set to the strict mode, the services on the working network are switched to the backup network only if the links between NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4 are all faulty. When LPT is set to the non-strict mode, the services on the working network are switched to the backup network if one of the links between NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4 is faulty. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Protection Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-7 Figure 6-3 Point-to-multipoint LPT NE1 NE3 RS-A Backup network Access link 1 Service network NE2 NE4 RS-B Access link 2
6.2.5 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection Schemes On the packet mode, the OptiX 1555/622H supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes. In the case of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes, the protection channel protects the services that are carried by the working channel. When the working channel becomes faulty, the services are switched to the protection channel. In the case of the 1+1 protection, services are dually fed and selectively received. In the case of the 1:1 protection, services are singly fed and received. The APS protocol that is used in the MPLS tunnel protection is transmitted on the protection channel to exchange the protocol and switching status. The equipment at both ends performs service switching according to the protocol and switching status. The MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes comply with ITU-T G.8031. MPLS Tunnel 1+1 Protection Figure 6-4 shows the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection. 6 Protection OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Figure 6-4 MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection Ethernet board Switching Ethernet board Access Ethernet board Switching Ethernet board Subnetwork Service detection point Working path Protection/Protocol path Subnetwork Access Service detection point
In the case of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection, services are dually fed and selectively received. When the working channel becomes faulty, the receive end receives services from the protection channel. In this manner, service switching is realized. l The detection method is as follows: At the physical layer, the loss of signals is detected in every microsecond. At the link layer, the MPLS OAM mechanism performs the detection. In the case of FFD packets, the system supports seven types of transmit frequency: 3.33 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, and 500 ms; in the case of CV packets, the system supports the transmit frequency of 1s. To ensure that the automatic protection switching time of the MPLS tunnel is within 50 ms, the detection time of the MPLS OAM mechanism needs to be set to 3.33 ms. l Switching process: The receive end selects the service according to the link status. MPLS Tunnel 1:1 Protection Figure 6-5 shows the MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection. Figure 6-5 MPLS Tunnel 1:1 Protection Ethernet board Switching Ethernet board Ethernet board Switching Ethernet board Access Subnetwork Service detection point Working path Protection/Protocol path Subnetwork Service detection point Access
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Protection Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-9 In the case of the MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection, services are singly fed and received. When the working channel is normal, services are transmitted on the working channel. When the working channel becomes faulty, services are switched to the protection channel. The APS protocol is transmitted on the protection channel to exchange the protocol and switching status. The equipment at both ends performs service switching according to the protocol and switching status. l The detection method is as follows: At the physical layer, the loss of signals is detected in every microsecond. At the link layer, the MPLS OAM mechanism performs the detection. To ensure that the automatic protection switching time of the MPLS tunnel is within 50 ms, the detection time of the MPLS OAM mechanism needs to be set to 3.33 ms. l Switching process: After a negotiation through the APS protocol, the transmit end switches the service to the protection channel, and the receive end receives the service from the protection channel. Protection Parameters Table 6-3 lists the parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes. Table 6-3 Parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes Swit chin g Type Revert ive Mode Swit chin g Prot ocol Switchi ng Mode Switc hing Time Switching Delay Time Default WTR Time Switching Condition (Any of the conditions triggers the switching) 1+1 single - ended switc hing Non- reverti ve mode APS proto col Automati c switching Lockout of switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching 50 ms 0s to 10 s - l The hardware or software of the board is faulty. l A cold reset occurs on the board. l A switchin g comman d is manually issued. l The MPLS OAM 6 Protection OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Swit chin g Type Revert ive Mode Swit chin g Prot ocol Switchi ng Mode Switc hing Time Switching Delay Time Default WTR Time Switching Condition (Any of the conditions triggers the switching) 1+1 dual- ended switc hing Non- reverti ve mode APS proto col Automati c switching Lockout of switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching mechanis m detects an LSP failure. 50 ms 0s to 10 s - 1+1 single - ended switc hing Reverti ve mode APS proto col Automati c switching Lockout of switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching 50 ms 0s to 10 s 5 minutes 1+1 dual- ended switc hing Reverti ve mode APS proto col Automati c switching Lockout of switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching 50 ms 0s to 10 s 5 minutes OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Protection Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-11 Swit chin g Type Revert ive Mode Swit chin g Prot ocol Switchi ng Mode Switc hing Time Switching Delay Time Default WTR Time Switching Condition (Any of the conditions triggers the switching) 1:1 dual- ended switc hing Non- reverti ve mode APS proto col Automati c switching Lockout of switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching 50 ms 0s to 10 s - 1:1 dual- ended switc hing Reverti ve mode APS proto col Automati c switching Lockout of switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching 50 ms 0s to 10 s 5 minutes
6.2.6 PW APS Protection PW APS is a type of network-level protection scheme. To be specific, when the working PW fails, the protection PW protects services in the failed working PW. PW APS is available in two types: PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1. PW APS 1+1 Protection Services are transmitted to the working PW and protection PW at the source end and are received from the working PW at the sink end, generally. When the working PW is faulty, services are received from the protection PW. Figure 6-6 shows the typical networking of PW APS 1+1 protection. 6 Protection OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Figure 6-6 Typical networking of PW APS 1+1 protection Accessing Data board Switching Data board Converging Data board Switching Data board Subnet Subnet Service detection point Service detection point Working channel Protection channel/ Protocol channel NE1 NE2 Base station
PW APS 1:1 Protection Services are transmitted to the working PW at the source end and are received from the working PW at the sink end, generally. When the working PW is faulty, services are transmitted to the protection PW at the source end and are received form the protection PW at the sink end. Figure 6-7 shows the typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection. Figure 6-7 Typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection Accessing Data board Switching Data board Converging Data board Switching Data board Subnet Subnet Service detection point Service detection point Working channel Protection channel/ Protocol channel NE1 NE2 Base station
Table 6-4 provides the parameters of PW APS protection. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Protection Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-13 Table 6-4 Parameters of PW APS protection Swit chin g Type Revert ive Mode Swit chin g Prot ocol Switchi ng Mode Switc hing Durat ion Switching Hold-Off Time WTR Time Switching Condition (Any of the Following Conditions Triggers the Switching) 1+1 1:1 Reverti ve Non- reverti ve APS proto col Lockout of protectio n Forced switching Automati c switching Manual switching Exercise switching 50 ms 0s to 10s 1 minute to 12 minutes The board has a hardware or software failure. A cold reset occurs on the board. A switching command is manually issued. The PW OAM mechanism detects a PW failure.
For details on PW APS protection, see the Feature Description. 6 Protection OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 7 Product and Application Scenarios About This Chapter The OptiX 155/622H supports multiple networking modes on the dual domains. Hence, it can meet the requirements of different application scenarios. 7.1 Basic Networking Mode When the OptiX 155/622H functions as the access equipment, it can construct hybrid networks with Huawei Metro and OSN equipment series. The networking modes supported by the OptiX 155/622H include the point-to-point, chain, ring, hub, and mesh. 7.2 Typical Networking Modes on the Packet Domain The OptiX 155/622H can realize the function of the Ethernet services that are based on the packet mode on the TDM network. 7.3 Hybrid Networking with the OptiX PTN Equipment The OptiX 155/622H supports the E1 CES technology and therefore can be networked with the OptiX PTN equipment. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 Product and Application Scenarios Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-1 7.1 Basic Networking Mode When the OptiX 155/622H functions as the access equipment, it can construct hybrid networks with Huawei Metro and OSN equipment series. The networking modes supported by the OptiX 155/622H include the point-to-point, chain, ring, hub, and mesh. The OptiX 155/622H supports 21.25 Gbit/s higher order cross-connections, and 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-connections. It can be configured as multiple terminal multiplexers (TMs), add/drop multiplexers (ADMs), or multiple add/drop multiplexers (MADMs). It also supports service grooming and protection among multiple systems. In this manner, the networking capability and the service grooming capability among networks are significantly improved. 7.2 Typical Networking Modes on the Packet Domain The OptiX 155/622H can realize the function of the Ethernet services that are based on the packet mode on the TDM network. Figure 7-1 shows a typical networking mode on the packet domain. 7 Product and Application Scenarios OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Figure 7-1 Typical networking mode on the packet domain 10GE ring STM-16/64 Convergence node OSN 3500 OSN 3500 GE ring OSN 1500/OptiX 155/622H BTS BTS Node B FE E1 E1 Access layer Convergence/Core layer Packet domain TDM domain STM-1/4 RNC BSC OSN 3500 OSN 1500/OptiX 155/622H The access layer, convergence layer, or core layer contains two independent domains, that is, the TDM domain and the packet domain. The access layer contains the TDM service ring (namely, the SDH ring. Its highest rate is STM-1/4) and the packet data service ring (namely, the GE ring). The convergence layer or core layer contains the TDM service ring (namely, the SDH ring. Its highest rate is STM-16/64) and the packet data service ring (namely, the 10GE ring). The E1 service at the access layer is mapped into the SDH ring at the access layer (that is, the STM-1/4 service ring as shown in the figure) and then converged on the SDH ring (that is, the STM-16/64 service ring as shown in the figure) at the convergence layer or the core layer through the convergence node. The FE service at the access layer is converged on the packet data service ring at the access layer (that is, the GE ring as shown in the figure) and then converged on the packet data service ring at the convergence layer or the core layer (that is, the 10GE ring as shown in the figure) through the convergence node. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 Product and Application Scenarios Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-3
7.3 Hybrid Networking with the OptiX PTN Equipment The OptiX 155/622H supports the E1 CES technology and therefore can be networked with the OptiX PTN equipment. Figure 7-2 shows hybrid networking of the OptiX 155/622H and the OptiX PTN equipment. The FE/E1 services at the access layer are mapped onto the GE ring at the access layer (the GE ring consists of the OptiX 155/622H and the OptiX PTN equipment), and then are converged to the SDH ring (that is, the STM-16/STM-64 ring in the following figure) at the convergence/core layer through aggregation nodes. Figure 7-2 Hybrid networking of the OptiX 155/622H and the OptiX PTN equipment STM-16/STM-64 ring OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 3500 GE ring PTN 950/1900 PTN 910/950/1900 OptiX 155/622H Node B Node B Node B FE/E1 FE/E1 FE RNC 7 Product and Application Scenarios OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 Product and Application Scenarios Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-5 8 Operation and Maintenance About This Chapter This topic describes the maintenance and network management capabilities of the OptiX 155/622H. 8.1 DCN Management The OptiX 155/622H supports the unified management of the outband DCN and inband DCN. By using different data transmission modes, the OptiX 155/622H supports the exchange of OAM information. 8.2 Network Management The OptiX 155/622H is uniformly managed by the iManager U2000 transmission network management system (hereafter referred to as the U2000). 8.3 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance The OptiX 155/622H provides powerful maintenance functions. Therefore, the user can conveniently monitor, debug, and troubleshoot the equipment. 8.4 Power and Environment Monitoring The OptiX 155/622H can monitor the power and environment. 8.5 Power Consumption Control The OptiX 155/622H supports the power consumption control function so that the user can manage the power of the boards with high power consumption. 8.6 Equipment Upgrade The OptiX 155/622H supports the in-service upgrade and loading of the board software and NE software. In addition, it supports the remote loading of the board software and the field programmable gate array (FPGA) with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-1 8.1 DCN Management The OptiX 155/622H supports the unified management of the outband DCN and inband DCN. By using different data transmission modes, the OptiX 155/622H supports the exchange of OAM information. When the OAM information of the OptiX 155/622H needs to be transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment, or when the OptiX 155/622H needs to transparently transmit the OAM information of third-party equipment, the following mode can be adopted to realize hybrid networking of the OptiX 155/622H and the third-party equipment: On the TDM domain, services such as the SDH service and Ethernet service carried by the OptiX 155/622H adopt the outband DCN networking mode. That is, non-service channels are used to transmit OAM information. On the packet domain, the Ethernet service carried by the OptiX 155/622H adopts the inband networking mode. That is, service channels are used to transmit OAM information. Outband DCN The outband mode requires a dedicated communication channel and a maintenance channel that is unrelated to the service channel. In outband networking mode, the NMS center can construct the DCN network with the managed equipment in various manners, such as E1 private line and Ethernet. The NMS manages the network in the management range through the DCN network. Compared with the inband networking mode, the outband networking working mode provides a more reliable management channel. When faults occur in service channels, the user can obtain the network management information in a timely manner and perform the real-time monitoring. The outband DCN networking technologies supported by the OptiX 1555/622H are as follows: l HW ECC The data that complies with the HW ECC protocol is carried by the DCC bytes. The OptiX 155/622H uses the regenerator section overhead bytes D1-D3 or the multiplex section overhead bytes D4-D12 as the physical channel to process the OAM information of Huawei equipment. l IP over DCC The OptiX 155/622H supports the IP over DCC. When the OptiX 155/622H, third-party equipment, and the NMS all support IP, the OAM information can be transparently transmitted through the IP over DCC. l OSI over DCC (TP4) The OptiX 155/622H supports OSI over DCC (TP4). When the OptiX 155/622H, third- party equipment, and the NMS all support OSI over DCC (TP4), the OAM information can be transparently transmitted through the OSI over DCC (TP4). l Transparent transmission of the DCC bytes The OptiX 155/622H can use the regenerator section overhead bytes D1-D3 as the physical channel to process the OAM information of Huawei equipment, and the multiplex section overhead bytes D4-D12 as one or several channels to transparently transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment. Or, the OptiX 155/622H can use the multiplex section overhead bytes D4-D12 as the physical channel to process the OAM information 8 Operation and Maintenance OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) of Huawei equipment, and the regenerator section overhead bytes D1-D3 as one or several channels to transparently transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment. l Management information transmission through the external clock interface When the D1-D3 bytes of the third-party equipment cannot transmit the OAM information of the OptiX 155/622H, the external clock interface of the OptiX 155/622H can be used instead. l SNMP The OptiX 155/622H supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP), and thus realizes unified network management when equipment of multiple vendors form the network. Table 8-1 lists the DCC resources allocation modes supported by the OptiX 155/622H. Table 8-1 DCC resources allocation modes supported by the OptiX 155/622H DCC Resources Allocation Independent Mode Cooperative Mode Channel type Supports both the D1-D3 and D4-D12 channel types. Capability SS46SCB: Supports 40 D1- D3 channels, or 20 D1-D3 channels and 6 D4-D12 channels. SS49SCB: Supports 32 D1- D3 channels, or 12 D1-D3 channels and 6 D4-D12 channels. Supports 19 D1-D3 channels, or 7 D1-D3 channels and 4 D4-D12 channels.
The independent mode and the cooperative mode have different capacities of supporting the DCC resources allocation. Before changing the DCC mode, you need to check whether the new channel mode can provide the required channel types and the number of channels. If not, you need to delete the channels that do not meet the requirements before changing the channel mode. Otherwise, the NEs cannot normally communicate with each other. CAUTION When the OptiX 155/622H (Metro 1000) is interconnected with the OptiX OSN 3500, the OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the D4-D12 channel type when the IP over DCC technology is used. Otherwise, communication is interrupted. Inband DCN The inband DCN mode does not require a dedicated DCN channel. In the inband DCN mode, the OAM information is considered as payload and is transmitted on the service channel. The inband DCN mode features flexible networking that does not require additional equipment. The inband DCN networking technologies supported by the OptiX 155/622H are as follows: OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-3 l HW ECC l IP protocol 8.2 Network Management The OptiX 155/622H is uniformly managed by the iManager U2000 transmission network management system (hereafter referred to as the U2000). The U2000 provides management, maintenance and test functions for the entire optical transmission system in terms of faults, performance, configuration, and security, through the Qx interface or human-machine language interface. The U2000 improves the network service quality and reduces maintenance costs, thus ensuring reasonable utilization of network resources. The OptiX 155/622H provides management for the element management system (EMS), NMS, and LCT, and also provides serial port access management. 8.3 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance The OptiX 155/622H provides powerful maintenance functions. Therefore, the user can conveniently monitor, debug, and troubleshoot the equipment. Alarm and Performance Management l The SCB board provides audible and visual alarms in the case of an emergency, thus assisting the network administrator in taking prompt measures. l Provides the alarm input and output function, thus facilitating the collection of equipment alarms. l The running status indicator and alarm indicator are available on each board, thus assisting the administrator in locating and handling faults promptly. l Dynamically monitors the equipment operation and alarm status of all stations in the network on the NMS. Fault Locating l The PDH processing boards support the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function, which can be used to remotely test bit errors. l The NMS supports the 2M PRBS test function. l Provides the press-to-collect function for collecting fault data, which shortens the data collection time before the service recovery. You can collect the fault data selectively according to the actual conditions and can stop the collection process. l Supports the loopback configuration on the port during the power-on process of the equipment, which meets the test requirement of one-time visit to the site. l The service boards support inloop and outloop on ports. l Provides the remote maintenance function. In case of an equipment fault, the maintenance personnel can remotely maintain the equipment through the public telephone network. 8 Operation and Maintenance OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) OAM Management l Provides the Ethernet OAM function which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. l Supports the ATM OAM function. l Supports the MPLS tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Maintenance l Provides automatic shutdown function of the SDH single-mode optical interface. l Provides the orderwire function for management personnel at different stations to communicate with each other. l Supports the in-service upgrading and loading of the board software and NE software. The equipment also supports the remote loading of the board software and FPGA with the error- loading-proof and resumable loading functions. l Provides the network time protocol (NTP) function to realize synchronization among NEs. l The NMS supports the fiber auto-discovery function. l The NMS can display the interface impedance. l Supports centralized equipment management through the software. After the board is powered on, the board version matching is performed automatically. l Supports the simulation package loading and simulation package diffusion functions. l Supports the smooth upgrade from the TDM domain to the dual domains without a service interruption. l Supports diffServ based on MPLS. Supports the priority configuration based on tunnel. l Supports the query of the power consumption of the equipment and the available power of the NE, and provides the automatic power consumption control function. 8.4 Power and Environment Monitoring The OptiX 155/622H can monitor the power and environment. The OptiX 155/622H provides -60 V DC and +24 V DC power interfaces and can measure the input voltage and check the voltage status (severely undervoltage, undervoltage, overvoltage, and severely overvoltage). By working with the 220 V assembly chassis, the OptiX 155/622H can access 220 V/110 V AC power. The OptiX 155/622H also provides the alarm input and alarm output functions. The alarm input function can be used to remotely monitor the customer environment. The alarm output function can achieve centralized monitoring over all equipment alarms when the OptiX 155/622H is connected to the alarm interface of the centralized cabinet. 8.5 Power Consumption Control The OptiX 155/622H supports the power consumption control function so that the user can manage the power of the boards with high power consumption. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-5 When the maximum power consumption of an NE cannot meet the requirement of the actual configuration, the NE may fail to operate normally. The OptiX 155/622H supports the power consumption control function so that the equipment can operate normally. The NE monitors the rest permissible power consumption in real time. When the power consumption reaches the maximum value or is close to the maximum value, the NE reports the corresponding alarm to prompt the user to improve the allocation of power consumption. When a new board is inserted, if the total power consumption of all the boards exceeds the power consumption threshold for the NE, the logical board of this new board cannot be added and this board cannot start working normally. When the CXP board is started, the FE module and CES module are automatically shut down if the total power consumed by the NE exceeds the nominal value. 8.6 Equipment Upgrade The OptiX 155/622H supports the in-service upgrade and loading of the board software and NE software. In addition, it supports the remote loading of the board software and the field programmable gate array (FPGA) with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions. The OptiX 155/622H supports the upgrade of the NE software through simulation package loading and simulation package diffusion. Simulation Package Loading When you need to load the entire set of software to an NE, and the mapping between each board and software on the NE is defined according to the simulation software package format, you can use the function of simulation package loading to improve the loading efficiency. The simulation software package contains the following software: l The software that needs to be loaded to the NE l The package description file that defines the loading attributes of various software The simulation package loading has the following features: l Simplifying the upgrade operation l Improving the upgrade security l Improving the upgrade efficiency Simulation Package Diffusion In simulation package diffusion, the software package to be loaded is diffused among NEs through an inter-NE diffusion protocol. The NEs in the entire network then try to download the software package simultaneously. In this manner, the efficiency of software package loading is highly improved, and less manual intervention and operations are required during this process. The simulation package diffusion has the following features: l Diffusing the software package layer by layer so that multiple NEs can download the software package concurrently l Sharing the network load l Balancing the utilization of network bandwidth 8 Operation and Maintenance OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) NOTE The simulation package diffusion is supported by OptiX 155/622H V300R007C01 and later. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-7 9 Technical Specifications About This Chapter This topic provides the specifications related to the OptiX 155/622H. 9.1 General Specifications of the Equipment The general specifications of the equipment include the system specifications, transmission performance, and protection performance. 9.2 Specifications of Packet System Performance Different performance items for the OptiX 155/622H have different performance specifications. 9.3 Specifications of Optical Interfaces The specifications of optical interfaces include the specifications of SDH optical interfaces and specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces. 9.4 Specifications of the Electrical Interface The OptiX 155/622H supports the PDH electrical interface and DDN interface. 9.5 Specifications of the Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes the timing and synchronous performance, and specifications of the clock interfaces, the 64 kbit/s interfaces, the RS-232 interfaces, the RS-422 interfaces, and the orderwire phone interfaces. 9.6 Specifications of Ethernet Features This topic provides the specifications for testing Ethernet features. 9.7 Safety Certification This topic describes the related safety certifications that the OptiX 155/622H has passed. 9.8 Requirements for the Environment The OptiX 155/622H has different requirements for the environments for storage, transportation, and operation. This topic describes the requirements for these three types of environments. 9.9 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board This appendix provides the power consumption and weight of each board. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-1 9.1 General Specifications of the Equipment The general specifications of the equipment include the system specifications, transmission performance, and protection performance. 9.1.1 System Specifications The system specifications of the OptiX 155/622H include the weight, dimensions, and power consumption. 9.1.2 Transmission Performance The transmission performance complies with ITU-T Recommendations. 9.1.3 Protection Performance The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements. 9.1.4 Environmental Specifications The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation. 9.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility The OptiX 155/622H is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. 9.1.1 System Specifications The system specifications of the OptiX 155/622H include the weight, dimensions, and power consumption. Table 9-1 provides the weight, dimensions, and power consumption of the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-1 Weight, dimensions and power consumption Equipment Name Maximum Power Consumpti on Maximu m Weight Dimensions OptiX 155/622H 100 W 10 kg 436 mm (W) x 293 mm (D) x 86 mm (H)
NOTE If the power consumption of the hardware configuration exceeds 100 W, the system may become unstable. 9.1.2 Transmission Performance The transmission performance complies with ITU-T Recommendations. Table 9-2 lists the transmission performance. 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 9-2 Transmission performance Performance Description Jitter at STM-N interface Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825 Jitter at PDH interface Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783 Bit error Compliant with ITU-T G.826
9.1.3 Protection Performance The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements. Linear MSP Table 9-3 lists the linear MSP parameters. Table 9-3 Linear MSP parameters Protection Type Revertive Mode Switching Protocol Switching Time Default WTR Time Switching Condition 1+1 single- ended switching Non- revertive Not required 50 ms - Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS l R_LOC l R_LOF l MS_AIS l B2_EXC l B2_SD (optional) l Forced switching l Manual switching l Exercise switching 1+1 single- ended switching Revertive Not required 50 ms 600s 1+1 dual- ended switching Non- revertive APS protocol 50 ms - 1+1 dual- ended switching Revertive APS protocol 50 ms 600s 1:N dual- ended switching Revertive APS protocol 50 ms 600s
MSP Ring Table 9-4 lists the MSP ring parameters. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-3 Table 9-4 MSP ring parameters Protectio n Type Reverti ve Mode Switchi ng Protocol Switching Mode Switch ing Time Defaul t WTR Time Switching Condition Two-fiber bidirection al MSP Revertiv e APS protocol l Forced switching l Manual switching l Exercise switching 50 ms 600s Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS l R_LOC l R_LOF l MS_AIS l B2_EXC l B2_SD l Forced switching l Manual switching l Exercise switching Two-fiber unidirectio nal MSP Revertiv e APS protocol l Forced switching l Manual switching l Exercise switching 50 ms 600s
SNCP Table 9-5 lists the SNCP parameters. Table 9-5 SNCP parameters Protecti on Type Revertive Mode Switchin g Time Default WTR Time Switching Conditions SNCP Revertive 50 ms 600s Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC4 level SNCP: l R_LOS l R_LOF l R_LOC l MS_AIS l B2_EXC l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B3_EXC (Optional) l B3_SD (Optional) l HP_UNEQ (Optional) 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Protecti on Type Revertive Mode Switchin g Time Default WTR Time Switching Conditions Non- revertive 50 ms - l HP_TIM (Optional) Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC3 level SNCP: l TU_LOP l TU_AIS l B3_EXC (Optional) l B3_SD (Optional) Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC12 level SNCP: l TU_LOP l TU_AIS l BIP_EXC (Optional) l BIP_SD (Optional)
9.1.4 Environmental Specifications The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation. The equipment can operate normally in the long term in the environment defined in Table 9-6. Table 9-6 Environment specifications for long-term operation Specifications Description Altitude 4000 m Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa Temperature 0C to 45C OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-5 Specifications Description Relative humidity 10% to 90% Anti-seismic performance Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD
9.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility The OptiX 155/622H is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. Table 9-7 lists the specifications of the electromagnetic compatibility test for the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-7 Specifications of the electromagnetic compatibility test Test Item Standard Compliance Conducted emission EN55022 Electrostatic discharge EN61000-4-2 Inject current immunity ENV50141 Immunity to radiated electrostatic fields ENV50140
9.2 Specifications of Packet System Performance Different performance items for the OptiX 155/622H have different performance specifications. Table 9-8 lists the system performance specifications of the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-8 Functional features of the CXP board Functional Feature Description Number of FE electrical interfaces 4 Number of FE optical interfaces 2 Number of GE optical interfaces 4 Connector RJ-45 LC Interface type 100BASE-TX 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX/LX/ VX/ZX 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Functional Feature Description Optical module Supports the hot swappable SFP optical module. Supports a transmission distance of 500 m, 10 km, 40 km, or 80 km through the optical interfaces. Supports the colored optical interface. Working mode FE electrical interfaces Auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex FE optical interface 100M full-duplex GE optical interface Auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex Interface characteristics l Supports the settings of the MTU at the Ethernet port. l Supports the settings of loop mode, query of port status, query of optical interface type, and others. Loopback function l Supports PHY inloop at the Ethernet port. l Supports MAC outloop at the Ethernet port. Format of service frame Provides the Layer 2 forwarding function. Supports the frame encapsulation formats that comply with IEEE 802.1q. Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes. Ethernet service type l Supports the point-to-point E-line service. l Supports the multipoint-to-point E-Aggr service. QoS Provides powerful QoS capabilities, including the simple flow classification and complex flow classification of the VLAN packet and MPLS packet, and the bandwidth limit function. Link aggregation group (LAG) Supports up to 16 LAGs. Each LAG supports up to eight LAG members. Protection scheme l Supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection. l Supports the MPLS PW 1+1/1:1 protection. l Supports the LAG protection. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-7 Functional Feature Description Clock function l Supports the synchronous Ethernet clock. l Supports the IEEE 1888 V2-compliant time synchronization. Maintenance features l Supports detection of port faults by providing alarms and performance events to facilitate management and maintenance of the equipment. These alarms and performance events are related to the Ethernet interface connection failure, installation of an improper optical module, and shut-down of laser. l Supports the hot swapping of optical module and query of optical module. l Supports the RMOM counting function. l Supports the warm reset and cold reset. MPLS OAM Supports the MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. ETH-OAM Supports the ETH-OAM that complies with IEEE 802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah. VLAN tags Each port supports 4K VLAN tags. Number of traffic classes supported by the system 1024 ETH OAM instances supported by the system 256 Number of E-line services 1024 Number of E-Aggr services 4 E1 CES 16 Number of MPLS tunnels 512 unidirectional MPLS tunnels Value range of the label: 16 to 32K Number of static PWs 512 Value range of the label: 16 to 32K PW OAM Supports the PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. Number of QinQ links 1024 Number of MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection groups and number of MPLS PW 1+1/1:1 protection groups The maximum sum of the number of MPLS tunnel protection groups and the number of MPLS PW protection groups is 128. 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Functional Feature Description WARNING MPLS labels refer to tunnel labels and PW labels. On the OptiX 155/622H, the value of a tunnel label must be different from the value of a PW label. This is because the tunnel and PW have the same value range (16 to 32K) and they cannot use the same label at the same time. On the OptiX 155/622H, the length of an MPLS label is 2K. Thus, the value of the label must be a consecutive value string ranging from 16 to 32K.
9.3 Specifications of Optical Interfaces The specifications of optical interfaces include the specifications of SDH optical interfaces and specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces. NOTE To provide effective precaution, on the NMS, the lower threshold of the input optical power of the board is set to more than the receiver sensitivity and the higher threshold of the input optical power of the board is set to less than the overload optical power. 9.3.1 SDH Optical Interface The specifications of the optical interface include the specifications of STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 optical interfaces, permitted frequency deviation at the optical input interface, and bit error tolerance at the optical output interface. 9.3.2 Ethernet Optical Interfaces This topic describes the specifications of the Ethernet optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H. 9.3.3 Colored optical interfaces This topic describes the specifications of the colored optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H. 9.3.4 Wavelength Configurations This topic describes the wavelength configurations on the OptiX 155/622H. 9.3.1 SDH Optical Interface The specifications of the optical interface include the specifications of STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 optical interfaces, permitted frequency deviation at the optical input interface, and bit error tolerance at the optical output interface. Specifications of the STM-1 Optical Interface Table 9-9 lists the specifications of the STM-1 optical interface on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-9 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface Item Unit Value Nominal bit rate kbit/s 155520 Type of optical interface - Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-9 Item Unit Value Operating wavelength range nm 1261 to 1360 1261 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580 Type of optical fiber - Multi- mode SC Single-mode SC/LC Maximum RMS spectral width () nm 80 7.7 3 - Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm - - - 1 Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB - - - 30 Maximum mean launched power dBm -14 -8 0 0 Minimum mean launched power dBm -19 -15 -5 -5 Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 10 10 Attenuation range dB 0 to 7 0 to 12 10 to 28 10 to 28 Maximum dispersion ps/nm 25 96 246 - Minimum optical return loss of cable at S (including any connectors) dB - - - 20 Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R dB - - - -25 Minimum sensitivity dBm -23 -28 -34 -34 Minimum overload dBm -14 -8 -3 0 Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 1 1 Maximum reflectance of receiver at R dB - - - -25
Specifications of the STM-4 Optical Interface Table 9-10 lists the specifications of the STM-4 optical interface on the OptiX 155/622H. 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 9-10 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface Item Unit Value Nominal bit rate kbit/s 622080 Type of optical interface - Ie-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Operating wavelength range nm 1261 to 1360 1293 to 1334/1274 to 1356 1300 to 1325/1296 to 1300 1480 to 1580 Type of optical fiber - Multi- mode SC Single-mode SC/LC Maximum RMS spectral width () nm 14.5 4/2.5 2.0/1.7 - Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm - - - < 1 Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB - - - 30 Maximum mean launched power dBm -8 -8 2 2 Minimum mean launched power dBm -15 -15 -3 -3 Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 10 10 Attenuation range dB 0 to 7 0 to 12 10 to 24 10 to 24 Maximum dispersion ps/nm 13 46/74 92/109 2400 Minimum optical return loss of cable at S (including any connectors) dB - - 20 24 Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R dB - - -25 -27 Minimum sensitivity dm -23 -28 -28 -28 Minimum overload dBm -8 -8 -8 -8 Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 1 1 Maximum reflectance of receiver at R dB - - -14 -27
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-11 Specifications of the STM-16 Optical Interface Table 9-11 lists the specifications of the STM-16 optical interface on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-11 Specifications of the STM-16optical interface Item Unit Value Nominal bit rate kbit/s 2488320 Type of optical interface - S-16.1 Operating wavelength range nm 1260 to 1360 Type of optical fiber - Single-mode LC Maximum RMS spectral width () nm - Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1 Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30 Maximum mean launched power dm 0 Minimum mean launched power dm -5 Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 Attenuation range dB 0 to 12 Maximum dispersion ps/nm 1 Minimum optical return loss of cable at S (including any connectors) dB 24 Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R dB -27 Minimum sensitivity dm -18 Minimum overload dm 0 Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Item Unit Value Maximum reflectance of receiver at R dB -27
Permitted Frequency Deviation at the Optical Input Interface Table 9-12 lists the permitted frequency deviation at the optical input interface on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-12 Permitted frequency deviation at the optical input interface Item Value Rate level of the optical interface STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 Standard specification (ppm) 20 20 20
Bit Rate Error Tolerance at the Optical Output Interface Table 9-13 lists the bit rate error tolerance at the optical output interface on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-13 Bit rate error tolerance at the optical output interface Item Value Rate level of the optical interface STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 Standard specification (ppm) 20 20 20
9.3.2 Ethernet Optical Interfaces This topic describes the specifications of the Ethernet optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H. On the OptiX 155/622H, the performance of the GE optical interfaces complies with IEEE 802.3z and the performance of the FE optical interfaces complies with IEEE 802.3u. For details, see Table 9-14. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-13 Table 9-14 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H Item Value Interface type 1000BA SE-SX 1000BA SE-LX 1000BA SE-VX 1000BA SE-ZX 100BASE-FX 15 km 40 km 80 km Fiber type Multi- mode LC Single- mode LC Single- mode LC Single- mode LC Single- mode LC Single- mode LC Single- mode LC Line code pattern 8B/10B encoding signal 8B/10B encoding signal 8B/10B encoding signal 8B/10B encoding signal NRZ NRZ NRZ Launche d optical power (dBm) -9.5 to -2.5 -9.5 to -3 -4.5 to 0 -2 to +5 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 Operatin g wavelen gth range (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1480 to 1580 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580 Central wavelen gth (nm) 850 1310 1310 1550 1310 1310 1550 Overloa d Optical Power (dBm) 0 -3 -3 -3 -8 -10 -10 Receiver sensitivit y (dBm) -17 -20 -23 -22 -28 -34 -34 Minimu m extinctio n ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5 9 9 8.2 10 10 Maximu m transmis sion distance (km) 0.5 15 40 80 15 40 80
9.3.3 Colored optical interfaces This topic describes the specifications of the colored optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H. 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 9-15 lists the performance specifications of the GE colored optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-15 Performance specifications of the GE optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H Item Specification Nominal bit rate 1.25 Gbit/s Operating wavelength range (nm) 1471-1611 Launched optical power (dBm) 0-5 Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -19 Minimum overload (dBm) -3 Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 Side mode suppression ratio (dB) 30 Maximum receiver R- point reflectance (dBm) -27 Maximum transmission distance (km) 80
9.3.4 Wavelength Configurations This topic describes the wavelength configurations on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-16 lists the wavelength configurations of the colored optical interfaces. Table 9-16 Wavelength configurations of the GE colored optical interfaces No. Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 20.22 1471 2 19.97 1491 3 19.72 1511 4 19.47 1531 5 19.22 1551 6 18.97 1571 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-15 No. Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 7 18.72 1591 8 18.47 1611
9.4 Specifications of the Electrical Interface The OptiX 155/622H supports the PDH electrical interface and DDN interface. 9.4.1 PDH Electrical Interface The specifications of the electrical interface include the bit rate error tolerance at the electrical output interface, permitted attenuation at the electrical input interface, permitted frequency deviation at the electrical input interface, and anti-interference capability of the electrical input interface. 9.4.2 DDN Interface The OptiX 155/622H supports DDN interfaces. 9.4.3 Ethernet Electrical Interface Features of the Ethernet electrical interface mainly refer to the electrical interface features of the Ethernet board. 9.4.1 PDH Electrical Interface The specifications of the electrical interface include the bit rate error tolerance at the electrical output interface, permitted attenuation at the electrical input interface, permitted frequency deviation at the electrical input interface, and anti-interference capability of the electrical input interface. Bit Rate Error Tolerance at the Electrical Output Interface Table 9-17 lists the bit rate error tolerance at the electrical output interface on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-17 Bit rate error tolerance at the electrical output interface Item Value Interface type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s 34368 kbit/s 44736 kbit/s Specification (ppm) 32 50 20 20
Permitted Attenuation at the Electrical Input Interface Table 9-18 lists the permitted attenuation at the electrical input interface on the OptiX 155/622H. 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 9-18 Permitted attenuation at the electrical input interface Item Value Interface type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s 34368 kbit/s 44736 kbit/s Specification (dB) Not specified 0 to 6 0 to 12 Not specified
Permitted Frequency Deviation at the Electrical Input Interface Table 9-19 lists the permitted frequency deviation at the electrical input interface on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-19 Permitted Frequency Deviation at the electrical input interface Item Value Interface type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s 34368 kbit/s 44736 kbit/s Specification (ppm) 50 50 20 20
Anti-Interference Capability of the Electrical Input Interface Table 9-20 lists the specifications of the anti-interference capability of the electrical input interface on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-20 Anti-interference capability of the electrical input interface Item Value Interface type 2048 kbit/s 1544 kbit/s 34768 kbit/s Specification (SNR) 18 dB 18 dB 20 dB
9.4.2 DDN Interface The OptiX 155/622H supports DDN interfaces. Table 9-21 lists the specifications of DDN interfaces. Table 9-21 Specifications of DDN interfaces Interface Type Description Standard Framed E1 interface Framed E1 signal Physical and electrical characteristics comply with ITU-T G.703. The frame structure complies with ITU-T G.704. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-17 Interface Type Description Standard Nx64 kbit/s interface V.35 interface Complies with ITU-T V.35. V.24 interface Complies with ITU-T V.24. X.21 interface Complies with ITU-T X.21. RS-449 interface Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A and RS-422A). RS-530 interface Complies with EIA RS-530. RS-530A interface Complies with EIA RS-530A.
9.4.3 Ethernet Electrical Interface Features of the Ethernet electrical interface mainly refer to the electrical interface features of the Ethernet board. Table 9-22 lists the specifications of the electrical interface on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-22 Specifications of the electrical interfaces Interface Type Line Code 10BASE-T Manchester coding signals 100BASE-TX Manchester coding signals
9.5 Specifications of the Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes the timing and synchronous performance, and specifications of the clock interfaces, the 64 kbit/s interfaces, the RS-232 interfaces, the RS-422 interfaces, and the orderwire phone interfaces. 9.5.1 Specifications of the Clock Interface The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703. 9.5.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX 155/622H complies with ITU-T G. 813. 9.5.3 64 kbit/s Interface The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703. 9.5.4 RS-232 Interface The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232. 9.5.5 RS-422 Interface The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422. 9.5.6 Orderwire Interface 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) The specifications of the orderwire interface comply with ITU-T Recommendations. 9.5.1 Specifications of the Clock Interface The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703. Table 9-23 lists the specifications of the clock interface. Table 9-23 Specifications of the clock interface Parameter Description Output frequency accuracy Complies with ITU-T G.813. Output jitter 0.05 UIpp (The test filter bandwidth is 20 Hz-100 kHz.)
Table 9-24 lists the specifications of the clock interface over the synchronous Ethernet. Table 9-24 Specifications of the clock interface over the synchronous Ethernet Parameter Description Output frequency accuracy Complies with ITU-T G.8262. Output jitter 1.5 UIpp (The test filter bandwidth is 5 kHz-20 MHz.)
9.5.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX 155/622H complies with ITU-T G. 813. Table 9-25 lists the timing and synchronization performance. Table 9-25 Timing and Synchronization Performance Performance Description Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G. 813. Output frequency (in free-run mode) Complies with ITU-T G. 813. Long-term phase variation (in locked mode) Complies with ITU-T G. 813.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-19 Table 9-26 lists the timing and synchronization performance of IEEE 1588 V2 clock synchronization. Table 9-26 Timing and synchronization performance of IEEE 1588 V2 clock synchronization Parameter Description Precision of a single station 30 ns Precision of 20 stations 1 us
9.5.3 64 kbit/s Interface The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703. Table 9-27 lists the specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface. Table 9-27 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface Specifications Description Bit rate 64 kbit/s Timing signals From RX Coding style Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Output pulse waveform Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Output interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Input interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703
9.5.4 RS-232 Interface The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232. Table 9-28 lists the specifications of the RS-232 interface. Table 9-28 Specifications of the RS-232 interface Specifications Description Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only Electrical levels 5 V to 15 V
9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 9.5.5 RS-422 Interface The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422. Table 9-29 lists the specifications of the RS-422 interface. Table 9-29 Specifications of the RS-422 interface Specifications Description Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only Electrical levels 2.0 V
9.5.6 Orderwire Interface The specifications of the orderwire interface comply with ITU-T Recommendations. Table 9-30 list the specifications of the orderwire interface. Table 9-30 Specifications of the orderwire interface Specifications Description Speech channel interface - Impedance 600 ohms Bandwidth 300 Hz-3400 Hz Operating current 18 mA Input gain -4/0/0 dB Output gain 0/-7/0 dB Signalling DTMF complying with ITU-T Rec. Q.23 Analog EOW extension - Impedance 600 ohms Bandwidth 300 Hz-3400 Hz Tx level -3.5 dBr 1 dBr Rx level -3.5 dBr 1 dBr
9.6 Specifications of Ethernet Features This topic provides the specifications for testing Ethernet features. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-21 Table 9-31 and Table 9-32 list the test specifications of major Ethernet features. Table 9-31 Test specifications of the single-port 10M bidirectional full-duplex feature Item Value Number of bound VC-12s 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Packet length (byte) 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518 Test result Throughput a
95%
95%
95%
95%
90%
90%
90% Delay b 500 s 500 s 500 s 700 s 700 s 700 s 700 s Ratio of frame loss c < 5% < 5% < 5% < 10% < 10% < 10% < 10%
Table 9-32 Test specifications of the single-port 100M bidirectional full-duplex feature Item Value Number of bound VC-12s 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 Packet length (byte) 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518 Test result Throughput a
95%
95%
95%
90%
90% 90% 88% Delay b 500 s 500 s 500 s 700 s 700 s 700 s 700 s Frame loss ratio c < 5% < 5% < 5% < 10% < 10% < 10% < 12%
a: This refers to the maximum frame rate that the system can bear when no frames are lost. b: This refers to the interval that begins when the last bit of the input frame enters the input port and ends when the first bit of the output frame appears at the output port. c: This refers to the ratio of the frames that should be forwarded (but are not forwarded due to insufficient resources) to total frames when the interface rate is constant. 9.7 Safety Certification This topic describes the related safety certifications that the OptiX 155/622H has passed. Table 9-33 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX 155/622H has passed. 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 9-33 Safety certifications Item Standard Safety IEC 60950-1 IEC/EN41003 EN 60950-1 UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No 60950-1 AS/NZS 60950-1 BS EN 60950-1 IS 13252 GB4943 Laser safety FDA rules 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 IEC60825-1 IEC60825-2 EN60825-1 EN60825-2 GB7247 Health ICNIRP Guideline 1999-519-EC EN 50385 OET Bulletin 65 IEEE Std C95.1 Environment protection RoHS
9.8 Requirements for the Environment The OptiX 155/622H has different requirements for the environments for storage, transportation, and operation. This topic describes the requirements for these three types of environments. 9.8.1 Environment for Storage The OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for storage. 9.8.2 Environment for Transportation The OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for transportation. 9.8.3 Environment for Operation The OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for operation. 9.8.1 Environment for Storage The OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for storage. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-23 Climate Table 9-34 lists the requirements on the climate for storage. Table 9-34 Requirements on the climate for storage Item Range Altitude 5000 m Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa Temperature -40C to +70C Temperature change rate 1C/min Relative humidity 10% to 100% Solar radiation 1120 W/s 2 Heat radiation 600 W/s 2 Wind speed 30 m/s
Biological Environment l Avoid reproduction of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete. l Protect the storage environment against rodents. Air Cleanness l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. l Table 9-35 lists the density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the storage environment. l Table 9-36 lists the density requirements on the chemically active substances in the storage environment. Table 9-35 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the storage environment Mechanical Active Substance Content Suspending dust 5.00 mg/m 3 Precipitable dust 20.0 mg/m 2 .h Gravel 300 mg/m 3
9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 9-36 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the storage environment Chemical Active Substance Content SO 2 0.30 mg/m 3 H 2 S 0.10 mg/m 3 NO 2 0.50 mg/m 3 NH 3 1.00 mg/m 3 Cl 2 0.10 mg/m 3 HCl 0.10 mg/m 3 HF 0.01 mg/m 3 O 3 0.05 mg/m 3
Mechanical Stress Table 9-37 lists the requirements on the mechanical stress in the storage environment. Table 9-37 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the storage environment Item Sub-Item Range Sinusoidal vibration Displacement 7.0 mm - Acceleration - 20.0 m/s 2 Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz Unsteady state impact Impulse response spectrum II 250 m/s 2 Static load 5 kPa NOTE The impulse response spectrum refers to the maximum response curve of the acceleration generated by the equipment under the specified impulse motivation. Impulse response spectrum II indicates that the duration of half-sine impulse response spectrum is 6 ms. Static load refers to the pressure from the top, which the equipment in package can bear in the normal pile-up mode.
9.8.2 Environment for Transportation The OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for transportation. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-25 Climate Table 9-38 lists the requirements on the climate for transportation. Table 9-38 Requirements on the climate for transportation Item Range Altitude 5000 m Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa Temperature -40C to +70C Temperature change rate 3C/min Relative humidity 10% to 100% Solar radiation 1120 W/s 2 Heat radiation 600 W/s 2 Wind speed 30 m/s
Biological Environment l Avoid reproduction of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete. l Protect the transportation environment against rodents. Air Cleanness l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. l Table 9-39 lists the density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the transportation environment. l Table 9-40 lists the density requirements on the chemically active substances in the transportation environment. Table 9-39 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the transportation environment Mechanical Active Substance Content Suspending dust No requirement Precipitable dust 3.0 mg/m 2 .h Gravel 100 mg/m 3
9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Table 9-40 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the transportation environment Chemical Active Substance Content SO 2 0.30 mg/m 3 H 2 S 0.10 mg/m 3 NO 2 0.50 mg/m 3 NH 3 1.00 mg/m 3 Cl 2 0.10 mg/m 3 HCl 0.10 mg/m 3 HF 0.01 mg/m 3 O 3 0.05 mg/m 3
Mechanical Stress Table 9-41 lists the requirements on the mechanical stress in the transportation environment. Table 9-41 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the transportation environment Item Sub-Item Range Sinusoidal vibration Displacement 7.5 mm - - Acceleration - 20.0 m/s 2 40.0 m/s 2 Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz 200 Hz to 500 Hz Random vibration Acceleration spectral density 10 m 2 /s 3 3 m 2 /s 3 1m 2 /s 3 Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz 200 Hz to 500 Hz Unsteady state impact Impulse response spectrum II 300 m/s 2 Static load 10 kPa OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-27 Item Sub-Item Range NOTE The impulse response spectrum refers to the maximum response curve of the acceleration generated by the equipment under the specified impulse motivation. Impulse response spectrum II indicates that the duration of half-sine impulse response spectrum is 6 ms. Static load refers to the pressure from the top, which the equipment in package can bear in the normal pile-up mode.
9.8.3 Environment for Operation The OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for operation. Climate The requirements on the climate for the operation of the OptiX 155/622H are as follows: l Table 9-42 lists the requirements on the temperature and relative humidity. l Table 9-43 lists other requirements on the climate. Table 9-42 Requirements on the temperature and relative humidity Equipment Name Temperature Relative Humidity Long- Term Operation Short- Term Operation Long- Term Operation Short-Term Operation OptiX 155/622H 0C to 45C -5C to 55 C 10% to 90% 5% to 95% NOTE The temperature and humidity values are tested in the place 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.
Table 9-43 Other requirements on the climate Item Range Altitude 4000 m Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa Temperature change rate 5C /h Solar radiation 700 W/s 2 Heat radiation 600 W/s 2 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Item Range Wind speed 1 m/s
Biological Environment l Avoid reproduction of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete. l Protect the operation environment against rodents. Air Cleanness l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. l Table 9-44 lists the density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the operation environment. l Table 9-45 lists the density requirements on the chemically active substances in the operation environment. Table 9-44 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the operation environment Mechanical Active Substance Content Dust particle 3 x 10 5 /m 3 Suspending dust 0.4 mg/m 3 Precipitable dust 15 mg/m 2 .h Gravel 100 mg/m 3
Table 9-45 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the operation environment Chemical Active Substance Content SO 2 0.20 mg/m 3 H 2 S 0.006 mg/m 3 NH 3 0.05 mg/m 3 Cl 2 0.01 mg/m 3 HCl 0.10 mg/m 3 HF 0.01 mg/m 3 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-29 Chemical Active Substance Content O 3 0.005 mg/m 3 CO 5.0 mg/m 3
Mechanical Stress Table 9-46 lists the requirements on the mechanical stress in the operation environment. Table 9-46 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the operation environment Item Sub-Item Range Sinusoidal vibration Displacement 3.5 mm - Acceleration - 10.0 m/s 2 Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz Unsteady state impact Impulse response spectrum II 100 m/s 2 Static load 0 NOTE The impulse response spectrum refers to the maximum response curve of the acceleration generated by the equipment under the specified impulse motivation. Impulse response spectrum II indicates that the duration of half-sine impulse response spectrum is 6 ms. Static load refers to the pressure from the top, which the equipment in package can bear in the normal pile-up mode.
9.9 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board This appendix provides the power consumption and weight of each board. Table 9-47 provides the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX 155/622H. Table 9-47 Power consumption and weight of each board Board Power Consumption (W) Weight (kg) OI16D - - OI4 9 0.2 OI4D 11 0.2 OI2S 10 0.21 9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Board Power Consumption (W) Weight (kg) OI2D 10 0.22 SL1O 14 0.66 SL1Q 9 0.6 SB2D 11 0.2 SB2L 7 0.2 SB2R 7 0.2 SLE 9 0.21 SDE 10 0.22 SP1S 3.95 0.21 SP1D 5 0.24 SP2D 5 0.25 PD2S 11 0.54 PD2D 14.5 0.66 PD2T 18.5 0.77 SM1S 4 0.2 SM1D 4.5 0.22 PM2S 9 0.52 PM2D 10 0.64 PM2T 11 0.74 PE3S 7 0.28 PE3D 7 0.28 PE3T 7 0.28 PT3S 7 0.28 PT3D 7 0.28 PT3T 7 0.28 ET1 26.1 0.74 ET1O 26.1 0.74 ET1D 16 0.26 EF1 25 0.68 OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Technical Specifications Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-31 Board Power Consumption (W) Weight (kg) EFT 8 0.26 ELT2 9 0.22 EGT 11 0.2 EFS 23 0.26 EFS4 10 0.3 EFSC 22 0.6 EGS 25 0.3 AIUD 23 0.66 AIUQ 25 0.68 N64 4 0.22 N64Q 5 0.20 FP2D 8.4 0.25 SHLQ 10 0.24 TDA 12 0.7 SS49SCB 21 0.8 SS46SCB 25 0.8 EMU 2.3 0.25 FAN 8.3 0.3 POI/POU 3.5 0.15 CXP 55 1.22
9 Technical Specifications OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 9-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 10 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development About This Chapter The OptiX 155/622H complies with RoHS directive (2002/96/CE) and WEEE directive (2002/95/CE). 10.1 Energy Saving The OptiX 155/622H supports static energy saving and dynamic energy saving. 10.2 Sustainable Development The OptiX 155/622H meets the requirements of sustainable development. All the components and packing units are designed in compliance with the associated standards for recycling. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-1 10.1 Energy Saving The OptiX 155/622H supports static energy saving and dynamic energy saving. Static Energy Saving Regarding static energy saving, the OptiX 155/622H takes the following measures: l Uses an easy scheme for board design. l Uses the power module with high efficiency. l Replaces the linear power supplies with switching power supplies. l Uses the standard digital voltage. l Provides a power switch for each NE. Thus, the power supply for the NE can be shut down manually. Dynamic Energy Saving Energy saving (power down) design for boards: l Idle buses are powered down. That is, the buses that are not configured with services and the buses of the idle slots are in power down state. In this manner, no power is consumed. l Idle optical ports are powered down. That is, idle optical ports of the line boards or data boards are in power down state. In this manner, no power is consumed. Energy saving (power down) design for boards: l The CES modules of the packet boards have the automatic shutdown function. 10.2 Sustainable Development The OptiX 155/622H meets the requirements of sustainable development. All the components and packing units are designed in compliance with the associated standards for recycling. l The OptiX 155/622H not only provides necessary packing materials, but also guarantees that the size of the package containing the equipment and accessories is at most three times the size of the net equipment. l The product is also designed for easy unpacking. For details about how to unpack the equipment, see the associated manual. In addition, all hazardous substances contained in packaging decompose easily. l Every plastic component that weighs over 25 g is labeled according to the standards of ISO 11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the equipment are provided with standard labels for recycling. l Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed by using simple tools. l All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove. Certain identification information, such as silkscreens, is printed on the front panel or subrack. 10 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 10-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 11 Standard Compliance About This Chapter This topic lists the standards that the OptiX 155/622H complies with. 11.1 ITU-T Recommendations The OptiX 155/622H complies with the ITU-T recommendations. 11.2 IEEE Standards The OptiX 155/622H complies with the IEEE standards. 11.3 IETF Standards The OptiX 155/622H complies with the IETF standards. 11.4 Environmental Standards The OptiX 155/622H complies with the environmental related standards. 11.5 Safety Compliance Standards The OptiX 155/622H complies with the safety compliance related standards. 11.6 Protection Standards The OptiX 155/622H complies with the protection related standards. 11.7 Relative Standards of the Packet Mode This topic describes the relative standards of the packet mode on the OptiX 155/622H. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Standard Compliance Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-1 11.1 ITU-T Recommendations The OptiX 155/622H complies with the ITU-T recommendations. Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations Recommendation Description G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber and cable G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical fiber amplifiers G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub- systems G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub- systems G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44736 kbit/s hierarchical levels G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP) G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN) G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems G.774 1-5 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element view G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detection and clearance criteria G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) 11 Standard Compliance OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 11-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Recommendation Description G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization networks G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy G.824 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544 kbit/s hierarchy G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects. I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification I.630 ATM protection switching ITU-T Y.1731 OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks. M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface V.24 List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) V.35 Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz group band circuits OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Standard Compliance Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-3 Recommendation Description V.28 Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange circuits X.21 Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series modems X.86 Ethernet over LAPS
11.2 IEEE Standards The OptiX 155/622H complies with the IEEE standards. Table 11-2 IEEE standards Standard Description IEEE 802.1ad Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks-Amendment 4: Provider Bridges IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management IEEE 802.1d Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments IEEE 802.3ae Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, and management parameters for 10 Gbit/s operation IEEE 802.3ah Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications IEEE 802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, medium attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mbit/s operation, type 100Base- T IEEE 802.3x Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for 802.3 full duplex operation IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mbit/s operation IEEE 1588 Defines precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and control systems implemented with technologies
11 Standard Compliance OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 11-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) 11.3 IETF Standards The OptiX 155/622H complies with the IETF standards. Table 11-3 IETF standards Standard Description RFC 2615 (1999) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH RFC 1662 (1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing RFC 1661 (1994) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP) RFC 2514 Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECT- IDENTITIES for ATM management
11.4 Environmental Standards The OptiX 155/622H complies with the environmental related standards. Table 11-4 Environmental standards Standard Description IEC 60068-2 Basic Environmental Testing Procedures IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental testing-Part 3: Background information-Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature-Earthquake vibration IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions-Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities-Section 1: Storage IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions-Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities-Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected locations ETS 300 019-1-1 Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations ETS 300 019-1-3: Partly temperature-controlled location NEBS GR-63-CORE Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Standard Compliance Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-5 11.5 Safety Compliance Standards The OptiX 155/622H complies with the safety compliance related standards. Table 11-5 Safety compliance standards Standard Description EN60825-1 Information technology equipment-safety EN60825-2 Information technology equipment-safety IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment including electrical business equipment CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
11.6 Protection Standards The OptiX 155/622H complies with the protection related standards. Table 11-6 Protection standards Standard Description IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 Protection of structures against lightning ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
11.7 Relative Standards of the Packet Mode This topic describes the relative standards of the packet mode on the OptiX 155/622H. Table 11-7 Relative standards of the packet mode and their description Relative Standards of the Packet Mode Description ITU-T G.8112 Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy ITU-T G.8031 Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks ITU-T Y.1711 Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks ITU-T Y.1720 Protection switching for MPLS networks ITU-T Y.1561 Performance and availability parameters for MPLS networks 11 Standard Compliance OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 11-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Relative Standards of the Packet Mode Description ITU-T G.8110 MPLS layer network architecture ITU-T G.8110.1 Application of MPLS in the transport network ITU-T G.8121 Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks RFC 3031 MPLS architecture RFC 3469 Framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)-based recovery RFC 4220 Traffic engineering link management information base RFC 4221 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management overview RFC 4377 Operations and management (OAM) requirements for multi-protocol label switched (MPLS) networks RFC 4378 A framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) operations and management (OAM)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Standard Compliance Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-7 A Glossary and Acronyms Terms and abbreviations are listed in an alphabetical order. A.1 Numerics A.2 A A.3 B A.4 C A.5 D A.6 E A.7 F A.8 G A.9 H A.10 I A.11 J A.12 L A.13 M A.14 N A.15 O A.16 P A.17 Q A.18 R A.19 S A.20 T A.21 U A.22 V A.23 W OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-1 A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) A.1 Numerics 1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic signal to be provided. 100BASE-T IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network. 100BASE-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire. 10BASE-T Defined in IEEE 802.3, it is an Ethernet specification that uses the twist pair with the maximum length of 100 meters at 10 Mbit/s for each network segment. 1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal. 1PPS Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This is because 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does not provide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as the reference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be used on other interfaces for high precision timing. 3R Reshaping, Retiming, Regenerating. A.2 A ABR Available Bit Rate AC Alternating Current ACAP The Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization (ACAP) operation provides orthogonal polarizations between two adjacent communication channels. Active/Standby switching of cross- connect board If there are two cross-connect boards on the SDH equipment, which are in hot back-up relation of each other, the operation reliability is improved. When both the cross-connect boards are in position, the one inserted first is in the working status. Unplug the active board, the standby one will run in the working status automatically. When the active cross-connect board fails in self-test, the board is pulled out, the board power supply fails or the board hardware operation fails, the standby cross-connect board can automatically take the place of the active one. add/drop multiplexer A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal to/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network. ADM See add/drop multiplexer ADM See optical add/drop multiplexing OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-3 Administrative Unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and a AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. Administrative Unit Group One or more Administrative Units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload are termed an Administrative Unit Group (AUG).An AUG-1 consists of a homogeneous assembly of AU-3s or an AU-4. Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. aging time N/A AIS Alarm Indication Signal Alarm A means of alerting the operator that specified abnormal condition exists. Alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the N2000. Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. alarm cable The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms. alarm filtering The alarms are reported to the N2000 BMS, which decides whether to display and save the alarms according to the filtering states of the alarms. The filtered alarms are not displayed and saved on the N2000 BMS, but still monitored. alarm indication On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board. (Metro) Alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected. It is associated with multiple transport layers. Alarm inversion For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (not inverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarm inversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion mode of NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whatever the inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set to automatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then the alarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port will automatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has already been configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When the alarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversion status of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported. Alarm Masking Alarms are detected and reported to the N2000 UMS, and whether the alarm information is displayed and stored is decided by the function of alarm masking. These alarms masked are not displayed and stored on the N2000 UMS. Alarm Severity Alarm severity is used to identify the impact of a fault on services. According to ITU-T recommendations, the alarm is classified into four severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning. A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Alarm suppression When alarms of various levels occur at the same time, certain lower-level alarms are suppressed by higher-level alarms, and thus will not be reported. ALS See Automatic laser shutdown APS See Automatic Protection Switching asynchronous Pertaining to, being, or characteristic of something that is not dependent on timing. Asynchronous Transfer Mode A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channel demand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of network resources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byte header. ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATPC See Automatic Transmit Power Control attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels. AU See Administrative Unit AUG See Administrative Unit Group auto-negotiation A mechanism that enables devices to negotiate the SPEED and MODE (duplex or half- duplex) of an Ethernet Link. Automatic laser shutdown A function that enables the shutdown of the laser when the optical interface board does not carry services or the fiber is faulty. The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function shortens the working time of the laser and thus extends the service life of the laser. In addition, the ALS prevents human injury caused by the laser beam. Automatic Protection Switching Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic. Automatic Transmit Power Control A method of automatically adjusting the transmit power at the opposite end based on the transmit signal detected at the receiver. A.3 B backplane A backplane is an electronic circuit board containing circuitry and sockets into which additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged; in a computer, generally synonymous with or part of the motherboard. backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards. bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. BDI Backward Defect Indicator BER See Bit Error Rate Binding strap A component installed on two sides of the cabinet for binding various cables. binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material). OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-5 BIP BIP-X code is defined as a method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. bit error An error that occurs in some bits in the digital code stream after being received, judged, and regenerated, thus damaging the quality of the transmitted information Bit Error Rate Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network. BITS See Building Integrated Timing Supply bound path Binding several seriel paths into a parallel path, thus improving the data throughput capacity. BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differs from repeaters because bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP addresses. broadcast The process of sending packets from a source to multiple destinations. All the ports of the nodes in the network can receive packets. Broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. BSC Base Station Controller BSS Base Station Subsystem Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the OSN series . That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly. Building Integrated Timing Supply A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit. BWS Backbone WDM System A.4 C cabling The method by which a group of insulated conductors is mechanically assembled or twisted together. cabling aperture A hole which is used for cable routing in the cabinet. Cabling frame The frame which is used for cable routing over the cabinet. cabling trough The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet. A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) captive nut Captive nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 'tee nuts') have a range of uses but are more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to the firewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing. CAR See committed access rate CAS Channel Associated Signaling CBR See Constant Bit Rate CBS Committed Burst Size CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization CCM Continuity Check Message CDR Clock and Data Recovery CDVT See Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Cell Delay Variation Tolerance This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressive sending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does not apply to end-systems. Centralized alarm system The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console. CFM Connectivity Fault Management Chain network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series. channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three.The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s). CIR Committed Information Rate Circuit The circuit of the service port on the access device. CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree class of service Class of service (CoS) is a technology or method used to classify services into different categories according to the service quality. Class of Service Class of Service is abbreviated to CoS. CoS is a rule for queuing. It classifies the packets according to the service type field or the tag in packets, and specifies different priorities for them. All the nodes in DiffServ domain forwards the packets according to their priorities. client A device that sends requests, receives responses, and obtains services from the server. Clock Synchronization Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent. Clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. CLP Cell Loss Priority CM See Configuration Management OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-7 committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. Concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence. Configuration Data A command file for an NE which defines the configuration of the NE hardware. With the file, the NE can coordinate with other NEs in the entire network. Configuration data is the key factor for the normal running of the entire network. Configuration Management In a network, a system for gathering current configuration information from all nodes in a LAN. Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object. congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service efficiency. Connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair. Constant Bit Rate constant bit rate. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. convergence It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent. Convergence A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or several channels of required signals. Convergence service A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for the specific requirements of the convergence service user. Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a probe so it appears that the described messages were so modified. corrugated tube N/A CoS See class of service CoS See Class of Service CPU Central Processing Unit CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check current alarm An alarm in unrecovered and unacknowledged state, unrecovered and acknowledged state, or recovered and unacknowledged state. Treatment measures must be taken on these alarms. Current Performance Data Performance data stored in the current register. An NE provides two types registers for each performance parameter of the performance monitoring entity. The registers are 15- minute register and 24-hour register, which are used to accumulate the performance data within the current monitoring period. A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Cyclic Redundancy Check A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values. Communications protocols such as XMODEM and Kermit use cyclical redundancy checking. A.5 D DC Direct Current DCC Data Communication Channel DCD Data Carrier Detect DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment DCN Data Communication Network DDF See Digital Distribution Frame DDN Digital Data Network Defect A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function. demultiplexing To separate from a common input into several outputs. Demultiplexing occurs at many levels. Hardware demultiplexes signals from a transmission line based on time or carrier frequency to allow multiple, simultaneous transmissions across a single physical cable. Device set It is an aggregate of multiple managed equipments. Device set facilitates the authority management on devices in the management domain of the U2000. If some operation authorities over one device set are assigned to a user (user group), these operation authorities over all devices of the device set are assigned to the user (user group), thus eliminating the need to set the operation authorities over these devices respectively. It is suggested to design device set according to such criteria as geographical region, network level, device type, etc. differentiated services code point Values for a 6-bit field defined for the IPv4 and IPv6 packet headers that enhance class of service (CoS) distinctions in routers. Differentiated Services Code Point Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits 0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various service streams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHB according to the DSCP value. DiffServ Differentiated Services Digital Distribution Frame Digital Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer cables. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-9 digital signal A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete statesfor example, high and low voltagesrather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream, as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHz sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signal is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structures and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected by external interference. Distributed Link Aggregation Group The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports. DLAG See Distributed Link Aggregation Group DNI See Dual Node Interconnection domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled. DQDB Distributed Queue Dual Bus DSCP See differentiated services code point DSCP See Differentiated Services Code Point DSL Digital Subscriber Line DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer DSR Data Set Ready DTE Data Terminal Equipments DTR Data Terminal Ready Dual Node Interconnection DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case of an interconnection failure scenario. DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast- Asynchronous Serial Interface DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing A.6 E E-AGGR Ethernet-Aggregation E-LAN Ethernet LAN E-LAN A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains over the PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves as a Layer 2 switch. E-Line Ethernet line. An point-to-point private service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains. Ear bracket A component on the side of the subrack. It is used to install the subrack into a cabinet. ECC See Embedded Control Channel A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) EFM Ethernet in the First Mile ElectroStatic Discharge A sudden flow of electric current through a material that is normally an insulator. Embedded Control Channel An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer. EMS Element Management System encapsulation The technique used by layered protocols to add header information and possibly tail information to the protocol data unit. Enterprise System Connection A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s. Entity A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment or system that can be individually considered. For ETH-OAM, an OAM entity generally refers to a specified system or subsystem that supports the OAM protocol. For example, a Huawei Ethernet service processing board is an OAM entity. EPL See Ethernet Private Line EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN Service ESCON See Enterprise System Connection ESD See ElectroStatic Discharge ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.. Ethernet Alarm Group The Ethernet alarm group periodically obtain the statistics value to compare with the configured threshold. If the value exceeds the threshold, an event is reported. Ethernet Private LAN Both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. Ethernet Private Line A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. ethernet virtual private line service An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute EVPL See ethernet virtual private line service Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed. Exerciser - Ring This command exercises ring protection switching of the requested channel without completing the actual bridge and switch. The command is issued and the responses are checked, but no working traffic is affected. Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE. extra traffic The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-11 A.7 F Failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected. Fairness For any link specified in a ring network, if the data packets transmitted by the source node are constrained by the fairness algorithm, the source node is provided with certain bandwidth capacities. This feature of RPR is called fairness. fairness algorithm An algorithm designed to ensure the fair sharing of bandwidth among stations in the case of congestion or overloading. fault An accidental condition that causes a functinal unit to fail to perform its required function. FC Fiber Channel FD See frequency diversity FDDI See fiber distributed data interface FDI Forward Defect Indicator FE Fast Ethernet feature code Code(s) used to select/activate a service feature (e.g. forwarding, using two or three digit codes preceded by * or 11 or #, and which may precede subsequent digit selection). FEC See forwarding equivalence class FEC See Forward Error Correction fiber A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. Fiber Connect. A new generation connection protocol which connects the host with various control units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON. Fiber Connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector). fiber distributed data interface A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high- speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network. fiber/cable Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user information and network management information) and perform transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type. A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) FICON See Fiber Connect FIFO First In First Out Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the U2000 or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port. Forced switch This function forces the service to switch from the working channel to the protection channel, with the service not to be restored automatically. This switch occurs regardless of the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boards are satisfying a higher priority bridge request. Forward Error Correction A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. forwarding equivalence class A term used in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) to describe a set of packets with similar or identical characteristics which may be forwarded the same way; that is, they may be bound to the same MPLS label. FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre- specified by the sending and receiving parties. Free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference. frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. FTP File Transfer Protocol Full duplex The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link.On the communication link, both parties can send and receive data at the same time. A.8 G Gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-13 Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the network and one IP address of the Ethernet port. Gateway Network Element Gateway NE refers to the NE that communicates with the NMS via Ethernet or serial port line. The non-gateway NE communicates with the gateway NE via ECC and communicates with the NMS via the gateway NE. The gateway NE is a communication route that the U2000 must pass through when managing the entire network. The communication status between the gateway NE and the U2000 can be:(1) Normal: The current communication is efficient; (2) Connecting: The destination gateway responds, and the communication is interrupted but is being connected; (3) Disconnected: The destination gateway does not respond (Maybe the network cable is disconnected or not within the same network segment), and the communication is unreachable or the gateway is disabled manually. GE Gigabit Ethernet GFP Generic Framing Procedure GFP GFP is a framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15. GNE See Gateway Network Element GPS Global Positioning System GSM Global System for Mobile Communications GTS Generic Traffic Shaping GUI Graphic User Interface A.9 H half-duplex An operation mode of the Ethernet port. In half-duplex mode, a port can only send or receive data at a time. handle A component of the panel. It is used to insert or remove boards and RTMs in and out of slots. Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback. HDLC High level Data Link Control HEC Header Error Control History alarm The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories. History Performance Data The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is autoreported and stored in the NMS. HP Higher Order Path HPT Higher Order Path Termination A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) A.10 I IC Integrated Circuit IDU Indoor Unit IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IETF Internet Engineering Task Force IF Intermediate Frequency IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping IGMP proxy means that in some network topologies, the device does not set up the multicast routes, but to learn the information about the accessed multicast group members and forward it to the upstream multicast router. The upstream multicast router sets up the multicast routes. IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group. Input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30 second measurement intervals. Intelligent power adjusting The factors such as fiber cut, degradation of equipment, and removal of connectors may result in the loss of the optical power signals. The function of intelligent power adjusting (IPA) enables the ROP laser and booster amplifier (BA) of a section to be shut down automatically. In this way, the maintainers, their eyes in particular, can be protected for the exposed optical fibers when they are performing the repairs. Interface board area The area for the interface boards on the subrack. Internal cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces within the cabinet. Internet Group Management Protocol The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. IP Internet Protocol IP address In the TCP/IP protocol, it is used to uniquely identify the 32-bit address of the communication port, An IP address consists of a network ID and a unique host ID. An IP address consists of the decimal values of its eight bytes, separated with periods; for example,192.168.7.27. IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication. IPA See Intelligent power adjusting IS-IS Intermedia System-Intermedia System ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-15 ISO International Standard Organization ISP Internet Service Provider IST Internal Spanning Tree ITU-T International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization A.11 J Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability. jitter tolerance Jitter tolerance is defined as the peak-to-peak amplitude of sinusoidal jitter applied on the input ATM-PON signal that causes a 1 dB optical power penalty at the optical equipment. A.12 L label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. Label A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. A label is used to uniquely identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. A label does not contain topology information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information. LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol LAG See link aggregation group LAN Local Area Network LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information. layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch. LB See Loopback LBM Loopback Message LBR Loopback Reply LC Lucent Connector LCAS See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme LCD Liquid Crystal Display LCT See Local craft terminal A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) License A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and durability of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license consists of encrypted codes, and the operation authority varies with different level of license. Link In the topology view, a link is used to identify the physical or logical connection between two topological nodes. Link Aggregation Control Protocol Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an IEEE specification (802.3ad) that allows you to bundle several physical ports to form a single logical channel. LACP allows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by sending LACP packets to the peer. link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamic provisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements. LLC Logical Link Control Local craft terminal A single layer network management scheme that manages a transmission network consisting of a maximum of five NEs. In this way, the comprehensive management of the multi-service transmission network is achieved. Normally, the cross-over network cables and serial port cables are used to connect the local craft terminal (LCT) to an NE. Then, the LCT can configure and maintain a single NE. Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. LOF Loss of frame LOM Loss Of Multiframe Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. LOS Loss Of Signal Lower Threshold When the performance event count value is smaller than a certain value, a threshold- crossing event occurs. The value is the lower threshold. LP Lower Order Path LPT Link State Pass Through LSP Label Switched Path LSR Label Switching Router LT Link Trace A.13 M MA See Maintenance Association MAC Medium Access Control OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-17 Maintenance Association That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities. Maintenance Domain The network or the part of the network for which faults in connectivity are to be managed, belonging to a single administration. The boundary of a Maintenance Domain is defined by a set DSAPs, each of which may become a point of connectivity to a Service Instance. MAN See Metropolitan Area Network Manual switching A protection switching. When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to the protection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability. Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of an SDH network. Marking-off template A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation holes for the cabinet. MBS Maximum Burst Size MCF Message Communication Function MCR Minimum Cell Rate MD See Maintenance Domain Mean launched power The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fibre by the transmitter. MEP Maintenance End Point Metropolitan Area Network A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN). The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network. MIB Management Information Base MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point MODEM MOdulator-DEModulator MP Maintenance Point MPID Maintenance Point Identification MPLS See Multi-Protocol Label Switch MS Multiplex Section MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation MSOH See Multiplex Section Overhead MSP See multiplex section protection MST Multiplex Section Termination MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) MSTP See Multi-service transmission platform MSTP See Multiple spanning tree protocol MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error MTU Maximum Transmission Unit Multi-Protocol Label Switch A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. Multi-service transmission platform It is based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of these services. Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host. Multiple spanning tree protocol The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/ RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. Multiplex Section Overhead The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH definition. multiplex section protection A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section. A.14 N N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel. NE See network element NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the U2000, which is used to manage the OptiX equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can configure, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis. network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board. network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node. network segment Network Segment means any discrete part of the Network. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-19 NLP Normal Link Pulse NMS Network Management System NNI See network node interface NPC Network Parameter Control nrt-VBR Non Real-Time Variable Bit Rate NRZ Non Return to Zero code NSAP Network Service Access Point NTP Network Time Protocol A.15 O OA See Optical Amplifier OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance OAM auto-discovery In the case of OAM auto-discovery, two interconnected ports, enabled with the Ethernet in the First Mile OAM (EFM OAM) function, negotiate to determine whether the mutual EFM OAM configuration match with each other by sending and responding to the OAM protocol data unit (OAMPDU). If the mutual EFM OAM configuration match, the two ports enter the EFM OAM handshake phase. In the handshake phase, the two ports regularly send the OAMPDU to maintain the neighborhood relation. OCP See Optical Channel Protection ODF See Optical Distribution Frame ODU Outdoor Unit OFS Out-of-frame Second OHA Overhead Access Function OLT Optical Line Terminal Online Help The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions for using their features when so requested by the user. ONU Optical Network Unit OOF Out of Frame optical add/drop multiplexing A process that adds the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel. Optical Amplifier Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium. Optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator. Optical Channel Protection In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical channel protection is configured. A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Optical Connector A component normally attached to an optical cable or piece of apparatus for the purpose of providing frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables. Optical Distribution Frame A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. Optical Interface A component that connects several transmit or receive units. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection. orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSN Optical Switch Node OSPF Open Shortest Path First OTDR See Optical Time Domain Reflectometer OTU Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength. Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals. Overhead Extra bits in a digital stream used to carry information besides traffic signals. Orderwire, for example, would be considered overhead information. A.16 P Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads can be passed through between the paired slots by using the directly connected overhead bus. When two SDH boards form an MSP ring, the boards need to be inserted in paired slots so that the K bytes can be passed through. pass through When services are passed through, it indicates that transmission equipment does not process the service received and only detects the signal quality. Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet loss ratio or other aspects. path protection Path protection is a special case of fixed partitioning sub-path protection technique where every primary path is partitioned into only one sub-path (i.e., h = D, diameter of the network). PBS Peak Burst Size PC Personal Computer PCM Pulse Code Modulation PCR Peak Cell Rate PDH See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-21 PE Provider Edge. A PE is the name of the device or set of devices at the edge of the provider network with the functionality that is needed to interface with the customer. Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15- min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics. performance threshold The performance threshold is a limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement data satisfies the preset alarm threshold or exceeds the preset grads, the PM subsystem generates a performance alarm. Performance threshold Performance events usually have upper and lower thresholds. When the performance event count value exceeds the upper threshold, a performance threshold-crossing event is generated; when the performance event count value is below the upper threshold for a period of time, the performance threshold-crossing event is ended. In this way, performance jitter caused by some sudden events can be shielded. A few performance events only have one threshold, which is the special case that upper threshold and lower threshold are equal. Permanent Virtual Connection Traditional ATM Permanent Virtual Connection that is established/released upon a request initiated by a management request procedure (that is all nodes supporting the connections need to be instructed by the network management). PGND Protection Ground PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode PIR Peak Information Rate plesiochronous Qualifying two time-varying phenomena, time-scales, or signals in which corresponding significant instants occur at the same rate, any variations in rate being constrained within specified limits. Note: Corresponding significant instants are separated by time intervals having durations which may vary without limit. Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy The Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used in telecommunications networks to transport large quantities of data over digital transport equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio systems. PLL Phase-Locked Loop Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported. POS Packet Over SDH Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. PPP Point-to-Point Protocol PRBS See Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence PRC Primary Reference Clock A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Primitive In the hierarchy of signaling system No.7, when the upper layer applies for services from the lower layer or the lower layer transmits services to the upper layer, the data is exchanged between the user and the service provider. In this case, the data transmitted between adjacent layers is called primitive. Private Line The line, such as the subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are hired by the telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special requirement of the user. The line is also called hired line. Generally, the switch device is not contained. protection grounding A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, the cable is yellow and green. Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labelled protection. Protection subnet In the NMS, the protection subnet becomes a concept of network level other than multiplex section rings or path protection rings. The protection sub-network involves NEs and fibre cable connections. Protection View The user interface, of the network management system, which is used to manage protection in the network. PS Packet Switched PSD Power Spectral Density Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. PVC See Permanent Virtual Connection PW Pseudo Wire PW Pseudo wire. A mechanism that bears the simulated services between PEs on the PSN (Packet Switched Network). A.17 Q QoS See Quality of Service Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoS is influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability, service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity. A.18 R Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. RDI Remote Defect Indication Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER. Reference clock A reference clock is usually of high stability , accuracy and autonomy and it's frequency can be compared with other clock as a benchmark. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-23 REG A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals. Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits. Regenerator section overhead The regenerator section overhead comprises rows 1 to 3 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. Remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) An remote optical amplifier sub-system designed for applications where power supply and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission. Resilient Packet Ring A network topology being developed as a new standard for fiber optic rings. RF Radio Frequency RFA Request For Announcement RFI Request for Information ring network A ring network is a network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals. RNC Radio Network Controller route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. router Links a local network to a remote network. For example, your company's network probably uses a router to connect to the Internet. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet. RP Rendezvous Point RPR See Resilient Packet Ring RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s. RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others are the same as RS232. RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RTN Radio Transmission Node RX Receiver A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) A.19 S S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is lost, the clock of this NE will trace another clock reference source of lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about the clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit the network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. The specific coding information is shown in the following table. Auto protection switching of clocks in the synchronous network can be implemented by using S1 byte and following the certain switching protocol. SAN Storage Area Network SC Square Connector SCR Sustainable Cell Rate SD See space diversity SD See Signal Degrade SDH See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SDP Serious Disturbance Period SEC SDH Equipment Clock Section The portion of a SONET transmission facility, including terminating points, between (i) a terminal network element and a regenerator or (ii) two regenerators. A terminating point is the point after signal regeneration at which performance monitoring is (or may be) done. Self-healing Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time. Serial port extended ECC The ECC channel realized by means of serial port. server A network device that provides services to network users by managing shared resources, often used in the context of a client-server architecture for a LAN. Service protection A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end. SES Severely Errored Second SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source settings Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user. SF See Signal Fail SF See SF SF Signal Fail. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near- end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-25 SFP See Small Form-Factor Pluggable SHDSL Single-line High speed Digital Subscriber Line Side Mode Suppression Ratio The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total source spectrum to the second largest peak. signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. Signal Degrade SD is a signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active. Signal Fail SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (not being the degraded defect) is active. Simple Network Management Protocol A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. slide rail Angle-bars on which shelves and chassis may slide and be supported within a cabinet or shelf. Small Form-Factor Pluggable A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. SMSR See Side Mode Suppression Ratio SNC SubNetwork Connection SNCMP See Subnetwork connection multipath protection SNCP See SubNetwork Connection Protection SNCP node Set the SNC node on the protection sub-network to support sub-network connection protection that spans protection sub-networks. The SNCP node of the ring sub-network can support electric circuit dually feed and selectively receive a timeslot out of the ring, thus implementing sub-network connection protection. The SNCP node is generally set on the node on the line board with the path protection type of the dual fed and selectively received. SNCTP See Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol SNR Signal Noise Ratio space diversity A protection mode. The main and standby radios are set up in Hot Standby mode, but are connected to their own antennas. Both antennas, separated by a specific distance, are receiving the signal transmitted from the online radio at the other end of the lin Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SPI Synchronous Physical Interface SSM See Synchronization Status Message A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) SSU Synchronization Supply Unit Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. STM-4 SDH Transport Module -4 STP See Spanning Tree Protocol Sub-network number It is used to differentiate the different network sections in the sub-network conference. Actually it is the first several digits (one or two) of the user phone number. An orderwire phone number is composed of the sub-network number and the user number. subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of network management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets. subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address. Subnetwork connection multipath protection The only difference is that SNCP is of 1+1 protection and SNCMP is of N+1 protection. That is, several backup channels protect one active channel in SNCMP. SubNetwork Connection Protection A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty, the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel. Support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor Suppression state An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not occur even when the alarm conditions are met. SVC Switching Virtual Connection Switching priority There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority. Switching restoration time It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when the line is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSP sub-network. Synchronization Status Message A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronous timing link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and the synchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two perform operations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold), and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-27 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B- ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure. Synchronous source A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would include clocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813. A.20 T T2000 The T2000 is a subnet management system (SNMS). In the telecommunication management network architecture, the T2000 is located between the NE level and network level, which can support all NE level functions and part of the network level management functions. See also NM. T2000 LCT A lite version of T2000. It is an element level management system for the optical transmission network. It can manage SDH, DWDM and Metro optical transmission equipment. See also LCT. Tandem Connection Monitor In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section). TCM See Tandem Connection Monitor TCP/IP See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol TDM Time Division Multiplexing tie wrap N/A TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect. Time Synchronization Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals keeps consistent with the UTC time. TM Terminal Multiplexer TMN Telecommunications Management Network ToS See Type of Service TPS See Tributary Protection Switch Trail management function A network level management function of the network management system. Through trail management, you can configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and print a trail report. A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Transceiver A transmitter and receiver housed together in a single unit and having some circuits in common, often for portable or mobile use. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Common name for the suite of protocols developed to support the construction of worldwide internetworks. transparent transmission A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase. Tray A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices. Tributary loopback A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes. 1. No loopback: It is the normal status. No loopback is needed when the equipment runs efficiently; 2. Outloop: When arriving at the line board after passing the input port in the local NE, the input signal is directly looped back to the service output end; 3. Inloop: The input signal is returned along the original trail from the tributary board of the target NE. Tributary Protection Switch Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. Tributary unit An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer and the higher order path layer. It consists of an information payload (the lower order VC) and a TU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the higher order VC frame start. Tributary Unit Group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC- n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed to increase flexibility of the transport network TTL Time To Live TU Tributary Unit TUG See Tributary Unit Group Type of Service A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) that is used for quality of service (QoS). The TOS field is 8 bits, broken into five sub-fields. A.21 U UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter UAS Unavailable Second UBR Unspecified Bit Rate underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor. UNI See User Network Interface Unprotected Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured. Unprotected sub- network It refers to a sub-network without any protection mechanism. The purpose of such configuration is to provide the basic data of trail protection for the subsequent trail management. OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-29 Upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the U2000. The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the U2000 side. Upper threshold The critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded. UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Upward cabling Cables or fibers connect the rack with other equipment from the top of the cabinet. User A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation rights of a user in the NMS. User Network Interface The interface between a network and the user of network services. UTC Universal Time Coordinated A.22 V VB Virtual Bridge VBR Variable Bit Rate VC See Virtual concatenation VCG Virtual Concatenation Group VCI Virtual Channel Identifier Virtual concatenation N/A Virtual Container A Virtual Container is the information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 s. Virtual local area network A subset of the active topology of a Bridged Local Area Network. Associated with each VLAN is a VLAN Identifier (VID). Virtual Private Network The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, and authenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provide remote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet. VLAN See Virtual local area network VP Virtual Path VPI Virtual Path Identifier VPN See Virtual Private Network A.23 W Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from. Wait-to-Restore A period of time that must elapse from a recovered fault before an LSP/span can be used again to transport the normal traffic and/or to select the normal traffic from. WAN Wide Area Network A Glossary and Acronyms OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Wander The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their ideal position in time (where long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less than 10Hz). washer A washer is a thin flat ring of metal or rubber which is placed over a bolt before the nut is screwed on. Wavelength Division Multiplexing Wavelength Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fibre, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fibre. Wavelength protection group The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group. WDM See Wavelength Division Multiplexing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing Winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe. Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic. WRED Weighted Random Early Detection WTR See Wait-to-Restore WTR See Wait to Restore Time OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary and Acronyms Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-31